Toshiba Surge Protector PT930 User Manual

TOSHIBA  
TECRA M1  
Portable Personal Computer  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC information  
Product Name : TECRA M1  
Model number : PT930  
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity  
Information"  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-  
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-  
ence will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
WARNING: Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may  
be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripher-  
als or peripherals not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in  
interference to radio and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used  
between the external devices and the computer’s external monitor port,  
USB port, parallel port, serial port, IEEE1394 port and microphone jack  
Use the shielded LAN cable to the LAN jack when connecting the  
computer to LAN. The shielded LAN cable is delivered to the customer  
with the computer when purchased. Changes or modifications made to  
this equipment, not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties autho-  
rized by TOSHIBA could void the user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC conditions  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Contact  
Address:  
TOSHIBAAmericaInformationSystems,Inc.  
9740IrvineBoulevard  
Irvine,California92618-1697  
Telephone: (949)583-3000  
EU Declaration of Conformity  
TOSHIBA declares, that the product: PT930* conforms to the following Standards:  
Supplementary Information:  
“The product complies with the requirements  
of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the  
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and/or the R&TTE  
Directive 1999/05/EEC.”  
This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related European  
Directives.ResponsibleforCE-MarkingisTOSHIBAEurope,Hammfelddamm8,  
41460Neuss,Germany.  
VCCI Class B Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modem warning notice  
Conformity Statement  
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision “CTR21”] for pan-  
European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN).  
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different  
countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance  
of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point.  
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first  
instance.  
Network Compatibility Statement  
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following  
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional require-  
mentsconditionalinEG201121.  
Germany  
ATAABAN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010and  
DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17  
Greece  
ATAABAN005,AN006andGR01,02,03,04  
ATAABAN001,005,006,007,011andP03,04,08,10  
ATAABAN005,007,012,andES01  
ATAABAN002  
Portugal  
Spain  
Switzerland  
All other countries/regions ATAABAN003,004  
Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network, please refer  
to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.  
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate national  
type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national type regulations,  
and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific function on specific  
national networks can be given.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Japan regulations  
Region selection  
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in the  
Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan region mode. It  
is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other selection.  
Redial  
Up to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are made, the  
modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing problems with the Black  
Listed code, set the interval between redials at one minute or longer.  
Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on analogue  
telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three minutes.  
The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for Telecommunica-  
tions Equipment.  
A02-0604JP  
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:  
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone company  
and give them the following information:  
The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem  
The registration number that is located on the device  
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the device which  
is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the computer outside of the  
main system label.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary. For the  
RENofyourmodem, refertoyourmodem’slabel.  
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the  
USOC RJ11C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type of service  
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. Connec-  
tion to telephone company-provided coin service (central office implemented  
systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is subject to state tariffs. If  
you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of  
equipment you can connect to it, the telephone company will provide this informa-  
tion upon request.  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In  
order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their  
equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or  
the operation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice in  
writing to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted  
service.  
If problems arise  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immedi-  
ately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone  
network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discon-  
tinue service. When practical, they will notify you in advance of this disconnection.  
If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible. When  
you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and  
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever  
needed on your modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an  
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.  
Disconnection  
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its present  
line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this change.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person  
to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone  
fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom  
of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it  
is sent and an identification of the business, other entity or individual sending the  
message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other  
entity or individual. In order to program this information into your fax modem, you  
should complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.  
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment  
1 The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification  
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal  
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not  
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The  
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may  
not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified  
equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the  
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or  
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to  
request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connec-  
tions of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system,  
if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important  
inruralareas.  
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections them-  
selves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority,  
or electrician, as appropriate.  
2 The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s Ringer  
EquivalenceNumber(REN)andanexplanationnoticesimilartothefollowing:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary. For the  
RENofyourmodem, refertoyourmodem’slabel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each  
terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of  
terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termina-  
tion on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject  
only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers  
of all the devices does not exceed 5.  
3 The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this equipment is  
jacktype(s):USOC RJ11C.  
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.  
Canada:1353A-L4AINT  
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand  
Modem warning notice for Australia  
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid Austel  
permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to ensure compli-  
ance with Austel standards when the country/region selection is set to Australia.  
The use of other country/region setting while the modem is attached to the  
Australian PSTN would result in you modem being operated in a non-compliant  
manner. To verify that the country/region is correctly set, enter the command ATI  
which displays the currently active setting.  
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following command  
sequence:  
AT%TE=1  
ATS133=1  
AT&F  
AT&W  
AT%TE=0  
ATZ  
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown above  
will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner. Consequently,  
there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the Telecoms Act 1991  
prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of non-permitted equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand  
The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance  
of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating  
conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which this modem is capable of  
operating depend on a specific network implementation which is only one of  
many ways of delivering high quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to  
operate should not be reported as a fault to Telecom.  
In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work properly if:  
a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and  
b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application at the  
other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires suitable  
software in addition to a modem.  
This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute a  
nuisance to other Telecom customers.  
SomeparametersrequiredforcompliancewithTelecom’sPTCSpecifications  
are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this modem. The  
associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for  
compliancewithTelecomSpecifications:  
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within  
any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and  
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds  
between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next.  
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5 seconds  
apart.  
Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged,  
and arrange for its disposal or repair.  
The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as follows:  
ATB0(CCITToperation)  
AT&G2(1800Hzguardtone)  
AT&P1(Decadicdialingmake-breakratio=33%/67%)  
ATS0=0 (not auto answer)  
ATS6=4(Blinddialdelay)  
ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)  
ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factory default of 15  
recommended)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ATS11=90(DTMFdialingon/offduration=90ms)  
ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)  
When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a value  
of 3 or 4. This ensures:  
(a) a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before the  
modem answers. This confirms that the call has been successfully  
switched through the network.  
(b) caller identification information (which occurs between the first and  
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.  
The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this is  
faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some reason you  
must use decadic dialing, your communications program must be set up to  
record numbers using the following translation table as this modem does not  
implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing” standard.  
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be entered  
normally.  
The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this  
there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal. Before  
reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the line with a standard  
Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if the phone performance is  
impaired.  
It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the Telecom line  
duringelectricalstorms.  
When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line connec-  
tion before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.  
This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert ca-  
dences and services such as FaxAbility.  
NOTETHATFAULTCALLOUTSCAUSEDBYANYOFTHEABOVE  
CAUSESMAYINCURACHARGEFROMTELECOM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General conditions  
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any changes to  
the specifications of these products which might affect compliance with the relevant  
PTCSpecifications.  
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the marketing  
description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The Telepermit may not be  
assigned to other parties or other products without Telecom approval.  
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may prepare any  
number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions on format, size and  
colour on the attached sheet.  
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof to  
purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be legitimately  
connected to the Telecom network.  
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product and in the  
sales literature, as required in PTC 100.  
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge of $337.50  
is payable where an assessment is based on reports against non-Telecom New  
Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each variation when submitted at the  
same time as the original.  
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description on Laser specification  
TheopticaldrivesuchasCD-ROMdrive,DVD-ROMdrive,DVD/CD-RWdriveand  
DVD Multi drive that is used in this computer is equipped with laser. The  
classification label with the following sentence is affixed to the surface of the drive.  
CLASS1LASERPRODUCT  
LASERKLASSE1  
LUOKAN1LASERLAITE  
APPAREILALASERDECLASSE1  
KLASS1LASERAPPARAT  
The drive with the above label is certified by the manufacturer that the drive  
complies with the requirement for laser product on the date of manufacturing  
pursuant to article 21 of Code of Federal Regulations by the United States of  
America, Department of Health & Human Services, Food and Drug Administration.  
In other countries, the drive is certified to comply with the requirement pursuant to  
IEC825andEN60825onclass1laserproduct.  
This computer is equipped with the optical drive in the following list according to  
themodel.  
Manufacturer  
Type  
CD-224E  
TEAC  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
TEAC  
GDR-8081N  
GDR-8082N  
DW-224E  
UJDA740  
GCC-4240N  
UJ-810  
Panasonic Communications  
HITACHI  
Panasonic Communications  
TEAC  
DV-W22E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Preface  
Manual contents ............................................................................. xxiii  
Conventions .....................................................................................xxiv  
Abbreviations ..................................................................................... xxiv  
Icons ................................................................................................. xxiv  
Keys ................................................................................................. xxiv  
Keyoperation ..................................................................................... xxv  
Display ...............................................................................................xxv  
Messages .......................................................................................... xxv  
General Precautions  
Stressinjury ................................................................................... xxvii  
Heat injury...................................................................................... xxvii  
Pressure or impact damage ......................................................... xxvii  
CPU performance disclaimer ...................................................... xxviii  
PC card overheating .................................................................... xxviii  
Mobile phone ................................................................................ xxviii  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
Equipmentchecklist .......................................................................... 1-1  
Hardware ............................................................................................ 1-1  
Software ............................................................................................. 1-1  
WindowsXPProfessional ................................................................... 1-1  
Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 ........................................................... 1-2  
Features ............................................................................................. 1-3  
Special features................................................................................. 1-9  
Utilities.............................................................................................. 1-11  
Options ............................................................................................. 1-13  
Chapter 2 The Grand Tour  
Front with the display closed ........................................................... 2-1  
Left side.............................................................................................. 2-2  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Right side ........................................................................................... 2-4  
Back side ............................................................................................ 2-4  
Underside ........................................................................................... 2-6  
Front with the display open .............................................................. 2-8  
Systemindicators ............................................................................ 2-11  
Keyboardindicators ........................................................................ 2-12  
USB diskette drive ........................................................................... 2-13  
Slim Select Bay modules................................................................ 2-14  
CD-ROMdrive................................................................................... 2-14  
DVD-ROMdrive ................................................................................ 2-15  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive ................................................................... 2-16  
DVDMultidrive................................................................................. 2-18  
Secondary battery pack.................................................................... 2-20  
Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor .......................................................... 2-20  
Weightsavermodule ........................................................................ 2-21  
AC adaptor ....................................................................................... 2-22  
Chapter 3 Getting Started  
Setting up your work space .............................................................. 3-1  
Generalconditions.............................................................................. 3-2  
Placement of the computer................................................................. 3-2  
Seatingandposture ........................................................................... 3-3  
Lighting .............................................................................................. 3-4  
Work habits ........................................................................................ 3-4  
Connecting the AC adaptor .............................................................. 3-5  
Opening the display .......................................................................... 3-6  
Turning on the power ....................................................................... 3-7  
Windows XP/2000 setup .................................................................... 3-7  
Turning off the power ....................................................................... 3-7  
Shut Down mode (Boot mode) ............................................................ 3-7  
Hibernationmode ............................................................................... 3-8  
Standbymode .................................................................................. 3-10  
Restarting the computer ................................................................. 3-12  
Restoring the preinstalled software from the Product  
RecoveryCD-ROM ..................................................................... 3-13  
Chapter 4 Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device ........................................................ 4-1  
Using the Touch Pad .......................................................................... 4-1  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the AccuPoint........................................................................... 4-2  
AccuPointprecautions ....................................................................... 4-2  
Replacing the cap............................................................................... 4-2  
Using the USB diskette drive ............................................................ 4-3  
Connecting 3 1/2" diskette drive ......................................................... 4-4  
Disconnecting 3 1/2" diskette drive ..................................................... 4-4  
Changing Slim Select Bay modules ................................................ 4-5  
Removingamodule ............................................................................ 4-5  
Insertingamodule .............................................................................. 4-6  
Using optical media drives ............................................................... 4-7  
Loading discs ..................................................................................... 4-7  
Removingdiscs ................................................................................ 4-10  
Writing CDs onCD-RW/DVD-ROM drive ......................................... 4-11  
Beforewritingorrewriting.................................................................. 4-11  
Whenwritingorrewriting .................................................................. 4-12  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive ............................................. 4-13  
Importantmessage ........................................................................... 4-13  
Disclaimer ........................................................................................ 4-13  
Read/writefunctionchart .................................................................. 4-14  
Beforewritingorrewriting.................................................................. 4-16  
Whenwritingorrewriting .................................................................. 4-17  
Drag’n Drop CD................................................................................ 4-17  
DataVerification ............................................................................... 4-18  
Video(DVD-R/-RW/-RAM) ................................................................ 4-18  
Media care ....................................................................................... 4-20  
CD/DVDs.......................................................................................... 4-20  
Diskettes .......................................................................................... 4-20  
Using the microphone ..................................................................... 4-21  
Modem.............................................................................................. 4-21  
Regionselection ............................................................................... 4-21  
Propertiesmenu ............................................................................... 4-22  
Connecting ....................................................................................... 4-23  
Disconnecting................................................................................... 4-24  
Wirelesscommunications ............................................................... 4-24  
Wireless LAN ................................................................................... 4-24  
Security............................................................................................ 4-25  
Bluetoothwirelesstechnology .......................................................... 4-25  
Wireless communication switch ....................................................... 4-26  
WirelesscommunicationIndicator .................................................... 4-26  
LAN ................................................................................................... 4-26  
ConnectingLANcable ...................................................................... 4-27  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disconnecting LAN cable ................................................................. 4-28  
Cleaning the computer ................................................................... 4-28  
Moving the computer ...................................................................... 4-28  
Heat dispersal .................................................................................. 4-29  
Chapter 5 The Keyboard  
Typewriter keys ................................................................................. 5-1  
F1 … F12 function keys ..................................................................... 5-2  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations........................................................ 5-2  
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard .............................................. 5-2  
Hot keys............................................................................................. 5-4  
Fn Sticky key ..................................................................................... 5-7  
Windows special keys ....................................................................... 5-7  
Keypad overlay.................................................................................. 5-7  
Turningontheoverlays ....................................................................... 5-8  
Temporarilyusingnormalkeyboard(overlayon).................................. 5-9  
Temporarilyusingoverlay(overlayoff) ................................................. 5-9  
Temporarilychangingmodes .............................................................. 5-9  
Generating ASCII characters ............................................................ 5-9  
Chapter 6 Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power conditions............................................................................... 6-1  
Power indicators ............................................................................... 6-4  
Battery indicator ................................................................................. 6-4  
DCIN15Vindicator ............................................................................ 6-4  
Powerindicator................................................................................... 6-4  
Batterytypes ...................................................................................... 6-5  
Main battery ....................................................................................... 6-5  
Secondarybattery(option).................................................................. 6-6  
Real Time Clock battery ..................................................................... 6-6  
Care and use of the battery pack ..................................................... 6-7  
Safetyprecautions.............................................................................. 6-7  
Chargingthebatteries ...................................................................... 6-10  
Monitoring battery capacity .............................................................. 6-11  
Maximizing battery operating time .................................................... 6-12  
Retainingdatawithpoweroff ............................................................ 6-13  
Extending battery life ........................................................................ 6-13  
Replacing the battery pack............................................................. 6-14  
Removingthebatterypack ............................................................... 6-14  
Installing the battery pack................................................................. 6-15  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBAPasswordUtility .............................................................. 6-16  
Userpassword ................................................................................. 6-16  
Supervisorpassword......................................................................... 6-17  
Starting the computer by password .................................................. 6-18  
Power-up modes ............................................................................. 6-18  
Windows utilities .............................................................................. 6-19  
Hot keys........................................................................................... 6-19  
Panel power off ............................................................................... 6-19  
SystemAutoOff ............................................................................... 6-19  
Chapter 7 HW Setup  
HW Setup ........................................................................................... 7-1  
Accessing HW Setup ......................................................................... 7-1  
HW Setup window .............................................................................. 7-1  
Chapter 8 Optional Devices  
PCcards ............................................................................................. 8-2  
Inserting a PC card ............................................................................. 8-2  
RemovingaPCcard ........................................................................... 8-3  
Using the PC card lock....................................................................... 8-3  
SDcards ............................................................................................. 8-5  
Formatting an SD card ....................................................................... 8-5  
Inserting an SD card ........................................................................... 8-6  
RemovinganSDcard ......................................................................... 8-6  
SD card care ...................................................................................... 8-7  
Memory expansion ............................................................................ 8-8  
Installingmemorymodule ................................................................... 8-8  
Removingmemorymodule................................................................ 8-13  
Hard disk drive pack........................................................................ 8-14  
RemovingtheHDDpack ................................................................... 8-14  
Installing the HDD pack .................................................................... 8-16  
Additional battery pack ................................................................... 8-16  
Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack .................................................. 8-16  
Installing ........................................................................................... 8-17  
Removing.......................................................................................... 8-18  
Additional AC adaptor..................................................................... 8-18  
Battery charger ................................................................................ 8-18  
Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor......................................................... 8-18  
External monitor .............................................................................. 8-20  
TV...................................................................................................... 8-21  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TOSHIBA Console button ................................................. 8-21  
Changingtheresolution .................................................................... 8-21  
i.LINK(IEEE1394) .............................................................................. 8-22  
Precautions ...................................................................................... 8-22  
Connecting ....................................................................................... 8-22  
Disconnecting................................................................................... 8-23  
Advanced Port Replicator II............................................................ 8-23  
Parallel printer ................................................................................ 8-24  
Security lock .................................................................................... 8-25  
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting  
Problemsolvingprocess................................................................... 9-1  
Preliminary checklist .......................................................................... 9-1  
Analyzing the problem ........................................................................ 9-2  
Hardware and system checklist........................................................ 9-3  
System start-up.................................................................................. 9-3  
Self test.............................................................................................. 9-4  
Power ................................................................................................. 9-4  
Password ........................................................................................... 9-7  
Keyboard ............................................................................................ 9-7  
LCDpanel .......................................................................................... 9-8  
Harddiskdrive .................................................................................... 9-8  
CD-ROMdrive..................................................................................... 9-9  
DVD-ROMdrive ................................................................................ 9-10  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive ................................................................... 9-11  
DVDMultidrive................................................................................. 9-13  
Diskettedrive.................................................................................... 9-15  
SD card ............................................................................................ 9-15  
PC card ............................................................................................ 9-16  
Infraredport ...................................................................................... 9-16  
TOSHIBADualPointingDevice......................................................... 9-17  
USB ................................................................................................. 9-19  
Memoryexpansion ........................................................................... 9-19  
Sound system .................................................................................. 9-20  
Monitor ............................................................................................. 9-20  
i.LINK(IEEE1394) ............................................................................ 9-21  
Modem ............................................................................................. 9-21  
LAN .................................................................................................. 9-23  
Wireless LAN ................................................................................... 9-23  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bluetooth .......................................................................................... 9-24  
Real Time Clock ............................................................................... 9-24  
TOSHIBAsupport ............................................................................. 9-25  
Before you call ................................................................................. 9-25  
Where to write .................................................................................. 9-25  
Appendixes  
Appendix A  
Specifications ................................................................................... A-1  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and Modes ......................................................... B-1  
Appendix C  
ATCommands .................................................................................. C-1  
Appendix D  
S-registers ......................................................................................... D-1  
Appendix E  
V.90 .....................................................................................................E-1  
Appendix F  
Internal Modem Guide ...................................................................... F-1  
Appendix G  
WirelessLAN..................................................................................... G-1  
Appendix H  
AC Power Cord and Connectors...................................................... H-1  
Appendix I  
PartsNumbers .................................................................................... I-1  
Glossary  
Index  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Congratulations on your purchase of the TECRA M1 computer. This powerful  
notebook computer provides excellent expansion capability, including multimedia  
devices, and it is designed to provide years of reliable, high-performance comput-  
ing.  
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your TECRA M1 computer. It also  
provides detailed information on configuring your computer, basic operations and  
care, using optional devices and troubleshooting.  
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing, first read  
over the Introduction and The Grand Tour chapters to familiarize yourself with the  
computer’s features, components and accessory devices. Then read Getting Started  
for step-by-step instructions on setting up your computer.  
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the preface to  
learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted with this manual by  
browsing through its pages. Be sure to look over the Special features section of the  
Introduction, to learn about features that are uncommon or unique to the computers  
and carefully read HW Setup and Passwords.  
Manual contents  
This manual is composed of the following nine chapters, nine appendixes, a  
glossary and an index.  
Chapter 1, Introduction, is an overview of the computer’s features, capabilities, and  
options.  
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour, identifies the components of the computer and briefly  
explains how they function.  
Chapter 3, Getting Started, provides a quick overview of how to begin operating  
your computer and gives tips on safety and designing your work area.  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, includes instructions on using the following devices:  
TOSHIBADualPointingDevice,SlimSelectBaymodules,USBdiskettedrive,  
opticalmediadrives, microphone, modem, Wirelesscommunicationfeatures, LAN.  
It also provides tips on care of the computer, diskettes and CD/DVDs.  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, describes special keyboard functions including the  
keypad overlay and hot keys.  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, gives details on the computer’s power  
resources and battery save modes.  
Chapter 7, HW Setup explains how to configure the computer using the HW Setup  
program.  
Chapter 8, Optional Devices, describes the optional hardware available.  
Chapter 9, Troubleshooting, suggests courses of action if the computer doesn’t  
seem to be working properly.  
The Appendixes provide technical information about your computer.  
The Glossary defines general computer terminology and includes a list of acronyms  
used in the text.  
The Index quickly directs you to the information contained in this manual.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms  
and operating procedures.  
Abbreviations  
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are enclosed  
in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only Memory  
(ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.  
Icons  
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator panel  
also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information on.  
Keys  
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer operations. A  
distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they appear on the keyboard.  
For example, Enter identifies the Enter key.  
xxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify  
such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign (+). For example,  
Ctrl + C means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press C. If three  
keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.  
ABC  
When procedures require an action such as clicking an icon or entering  
text, the icon’s name or the text you are to type in is represented in the  
type face you see to the left.  
Display  
ABC  
Names of windows or icons or text generated by the computer that  
appears on its display screen is presented in the type face you see to the  
left.  
Messages  
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention.  
Each type of message is identified as shown below.  
CAUTION: Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of  
equipment or failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or  
damage your equipment.  
NOTE: Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best  
use of your equipment.  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
xxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Precautions  
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and withstand  
the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be observed to further  
reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the computer.  
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions included  
in the text of the manual.  
Stress injury  
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort. It contains information  
on prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists than can be caused by  
extensive keyboard use. Chapter 3, Getting Started, also includes information on  
work space design, posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.  
Heat injury  
Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is used  
for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the temperature will  
not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for  
a long time (if you rest the computer on your lap, or if you keep your hands on  
the palm rest, for example) your skin might suffer low-heat injury.  
If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with the  
metal plate supporting the I/O ports. It can become hot.  
The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use. This condition  
does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the AC adaptor,  
disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.  
Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat. The material  
could be damaged.  
Pressure or impact damage  
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to strong impact.  
Excessive pressure or impact can cause damage to computer components or  
otherwise cause malfunctions.  
xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance  
Disclaimer  
CPU Performance in your computer product may vary from specifications under the  
followingconditions:  
1. use of certain peripheral products  
2. use of battery power instead of AC power  
3. use of certain multimedia games or videos with special effects  
4. use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections  
5. use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided design  
application  
6. use of computer in areas with low air puressure (high altitude >1,000 meters  
or >3,280 feet above sea level)  
7. use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 35°C (41°F to  
95°F)or>25°C(77°F)athighaltitude(alltemperaturereferenceare  
approximate).  
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design configuration.  
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-down. This  
is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost data or damage to  
the product when used outside recommended conditions. To avoid risk of lost data,  
always make back-up copies of data by periodically storing it on an external strage  
medium. For optimum performance, use your computer product only under  
recommended conditions Read additional restrictions under “Environmental  
Conditions” in the Appendix A of the Online Manual. Contact TOSHIBA Technical  
Service and Support for more information.  
PC card overheating  
Some PC cards can become hot with prolonged use. Overheating of a PC card can  
result in errors or instability in the PC card operation. Also be careful when you  
remove a PC card that has been used for a long time.  
Mobile phone  
Use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. Computer operation is  
not impaired but is recommended that a distance of 30cm be maintained between the  
computer and a mo-bile phone in use.  
xxviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and it identifies the computer’s  
features, options and accessories.  
CAUTION: Some of the features described in this manual may not  
function properly if you use an operating system that was not prein-  
stalled by TOSHIBA.  
Equipment checklist  
Carefully unpack your computer. Save the box and packing materials for future use.  
Hardware  
Check to make sure you have all the following items:  
TECRAM1PortablePersonalComputer  
Universal AC adaptor and power cord  
USB diskette drive (Provided with some models)  
Modular cable  
Spare AccuPoint (pointing device) caps  
LANcable  
SlimSelectBayweightsavermodule  
Software  
Windows XP Professional  
The following software is preinstalled:  
Microsoft® Windows XP Professional  
MicrosoftInternetExplorer  
• Modemdriver  
Display Drivers for Windows  
• TOSHIBAUtilities  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
WirelessLANdriver  
Bluetooth driver  
Sound Driver for Windows  
DVDVideoPlayer  
LANDrivers  
InfraredDeviceDriver  
TOSHIBADualPointingDeviceutility  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver  
TOSHIBAConsole  
Onlinemanual  
Documentation:  
TECRA M1 User's Manual  
Microsoft Windows XP manual package  
Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort  
End User License Agreement  
ProductRecoveryCD-ROM  
Windows 2000 Service Pack 3  
The following software is preinstalled:  
Microsoft® Windows 2000  
MicrosoftInternetExplorer6.0  
• Modemdriver  
DisplayDriver  
• TOSHIBAUtilities  
WirelessLANdriver  
Bluetooth driver  
Sound Driver  
DVDVideoPlayer  
LANDrivers  
InfraredDeviceDriver  
TOSHIBADualPointingDeviceutility  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver  
TOSHIBAConsole  
Onlinemanual  
Documentation:  
Microsoft Windows 2000 manual package  
The same documentation that is supplied with Windows XP Professional.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
ProductRecoveryCD-ROM  
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately.  
Features  
The computer uses TOSHIBA’s advanced Large Scale Integration (LSI), Comple-  
mentary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to provide  
compactsize, minimumweight, lowpowerusage, andhighreliability. Thiscomputer  
incorporates the following features and benefits:  
Processor  
Built-in The computer is equipped with an Intel® processor, which  
incorporates a math co-processor, a 64 KB level 1 cache  
memory and a 1MB level 2 cache memory. It also supports  
Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep™ technology.  
Intel®Pentium®Mprocessor1.3GHz  
Intel®Pentium®Mprocessor1.4GHz  
Intel®Pentium®Mprocessor1.5GHz  
Intel®Pentium®Mprocessor1.6GHz  
NOTE: Some models of the computers carry Intel® Centrino™  
technology, which is based on three separate technologies of  
Intel® Pentium® M, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection,  
and Intel® 855 Chipset Family.  
Memory  
Slots 128,256,512or1,024MBmemorymodulescanbeinstalled  
inthetwomemoryslotsforamaximumof2,048MBsystem  
memory.  
VideoRAM 32 MB of RAM is provided for video display.  
Power  
Battery pack The computer is powered by one rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery pack.  
RTCbattery The computer has an internal battery to back up the  
internalRealTimeClock(RTC)andcalendar.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
AC adaptor The universal AC adaptor provides power to the system  
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It comes  
with a detachable power cord.  
Because it is universal, it can receive a range of AC voltage  
from 100 to 240 volts; however, the output current varies  
among different models. Using the wrong model can  
damage your computer. See the AC adaptor section in  
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
Disks  
Fixedharddisk Available in five sizes.  
• 27.94GB(30.0billionbytes)  
• 37.26GB(40.0billionbytes)  
• 46.57GB(50.0billionbytes)  
• 55.88GB(60.0billionbytes)  
USB diskette drive Accommodateseither31/2"1.44-megabyteor720-kilobyte  
(Optional) diskettes. It connects to a USB port.  
NOTE: Computers in this series can be configured with an optical media  
drive installed in the Slim Select Bay. The available optical media drives  
are described below.  
CD-ROM drive Amaximum24-speed640MBCD-ROMdrivesupportsthe  
followingformats:  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
• CD-R(readonly) • CD-RW(readonly)  
DVD-ROMdrive Somemodelsareequippedwithafull-size,DVD-ROM  
drive module that lets you run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm  
(3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor. It runs DVD-  
ROMsatmaximum8speedandCD-ROMsatmaximum24  
speed. The drive supports the following formats:  
• DVD-ROM  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• DVD-Video  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
• CD-R(readonly) • CD-RW(readonly)  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM Somemodelsareequippedwithafull-size,CD-RW/DVD-  
drive ROM drive module that lets you run CD/DVDs without  
using an adaptor. It reads DVD-ROMs at maximum 8 speed  
andCD-ROMsatmaximum24speed. ItwritesCD-Ratup  
to 8 speed and CD-RW at up to 8 speed. The drive  
supports the following formats:  
• DVD-ROM  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• DVD-Video  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
CD-R  
• CD-RW  
DVD Multi drive Somemodelsareequippedwithafull-sizeDVDMultidrive  
module that lets you record data to rewritable CD/DVDs as  
wellasruneither12cm(4.72")or8cm(3.15")CD/DVDs  
without using an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller  
is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. The drive reads  
DVDsatmaximum8speedandCDsatmaximum24speed.  
ItwritesDVD-RandDVD-RWatmaximumsinglespeed,  
DVD-RAMatmaximum2speed,CD-Ratmaximum16  
speed, and CD-RW at maximum 8 speed. The drive  
supports the following formats:  
• DVD-ROM  
• DVD-R  
• DVD-Video  
• DVD-RW  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• DVD-RAM  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
CD-R  
• CD-RW  
Display  
The computer’s LCD panel supports high-resolution video graphics. The screen  
can be set at a wide range of viewing angles for maximum comfort and readability.  
Built-in 14.1" TFT screen, 16 M colors, with one of the following  
resolutions:  
XGA,1024horizontalx768verticalpixels  
• SXGA+,1400horizontalx1050verticalpixels  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Graphicscontroller A256-bitgraphicscontrollermaximizesdisplayperfor-  
mance.RefertoAppendixBformoreinformation.  
Keyboard  
Built-in 85 keys or 86 keys, compatible with IBM enhanced  
keyboard, embedded numeric overlay, dedicated cursor  
control,  
and  
keys. See Chapter 5, The Keyboard,  
for details.  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device  
Built-in Touch Pad A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest enable  
control of the on-screen pointer and scrolling of windows.  
Built-inAccuPoint This pointer control stick, located in the center of the  
keybord, provides convenient control of the cursor.  
Ports  
Parallel Parallelprinterorotherparalleldevice(ECPcompatible).  
Serial RS-232Ccompatibleport(16550UARTcompatible)  
Externalmonitor 15-pin,analogVGAportsupportsVESADDC2Bcompat-  
ible functions.  
UniversalSerialBus The computer has three Universal Serial Bus ports that  
(USB2.0) comply with the USB 2.0 standard, which enables data  
transfer speeds 40 times faster than the USB 1.1 standard.  
(The ports also support USB 1.1.)  
Docking interface port This port enables connection of an optional Advanced  
Port Replicator II described in the Options section.  
i.LINK™(IEEE1394) This port enables high-speed data transfer directly from  
external devices such as digital video cameras.  
Infrared The serial infrared port is compatible with Infrared Data  
Association (IrDA 1.1) standards. It enables cableless 4  
Mbps,1.152Mbps,115.2kbps,57.6kbps,38.4kbps,19.2  
kbps or 9.6 kbps data transfer with IrDA 1.1 compatible  
externaldevices.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Slots  
PCcard The PC card slot accommodates two 5 mm Type II cards or  
one Type III card.  
SDcard This slot lets you easily transfer data from devices, such as  
digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants, that use  
SDcardflash-memory.  
You can use memory module and Bluetooth SD card in this  
slot.  
Multimedia  
Sound system Windows sound system compatible sound system  
provides internal speakers as well as jacks for an external  
microphone and headphone.  
Video-outjack This jack lets you transfer video data to external devices.  
(S-Video) Use the S Video cable for both video-out. Data output  
depends on the type of device connected to the S Video  
cable.  
Headphone jack This jack lets you connect digital speakers or stereo  
headphones (16 ohm minimum). When you connect digital  
speakers or headphones, the internal speaker is automati-  
callydisabled.  
Microphone jack A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables connection of a  
three-conductor mini jack for monaural microphone input.  
Communications  
Modem An internal modem provides capability for data and fax  
communication.ItsupportsV.90(V.92).RefertoAppendix  
E. The speed of data transfer and fax depends on analog  
telephone line conditions. It has a modem jack for connect-  
ing to a telephone line. It is preinstalled as a standard  
device in some markets. Both of V.90 and V.92 are  
supported only in USA and Canada. Only V.90 is available  
in other regions.  
LAN The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10  
megabitspersecond, 10BASE-T), FastEthernetLAN(100  
megabitspersecond,100BASE-Tx)andGigabitEthernet  
LAN (1000megabitspersecond,1000BASE-T).  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Bluetooth  
Some computers in this series are equipped with Bluetooth  
functions. Bluetooth wireless technology eliminates the  
need for cables between electronic devices such as  
computers and printers. Bluetooth provides fast, reliable,  
and secure wireless communication in a small space.  
WirelessLAN Some computers in this series are equipped with a wireless  
LANmini-PCIcardthatiscompatiblewithotherLAN  
systems based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio  
technology that complies with the IEEE 802.11 Standard  
(RevisionBonly),and IEEE802.11Standard(RevisionA,  
B), and Turbo Mode.  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit  
rangeof54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9and6Mbit/s. (RevisionA,  
Revision A/B combo type)  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit  
range of 11, 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbit/s. (Revision B)  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit  
rangeof108, 96, 72, 48, 36, 24, 18and12Mbit/s. (Turbo  
Mode, Revision A/B combo type)  
FrequencyChannelSelection(5GHz:RevisionA/2.4  
GHz:RevisionB)  
Roamingovermultiplechannels  
CardPowerManagement  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on  
152bitencryptionalgorithm. (RevisionA/Bcombotype).  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on  
128bitencryptionalgorithm. (RevisionBonlytype).  
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data encryption, based  
on 256bit encryption algorithm. (Revision A/B combo type)  
SlimSelectBay  
Modules Slim Select Bay is a single-drive bay that accommodates a  
CD-ROMdrive,DVD-ROMdrive,CD-RW/DVD-ROM  
drive, DVD Multi drive, secondary hard disk drive or  
secondary battery. The TOSHIBA Mobile Extension  
enables hot insertion of modules when you are using a  
plug and play operating system.  
Weight saver To reduce weight, the Slim Select Bay module can be  
remove and a weight saver installed.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special features  
Security  
Security lock slot Connects an optional security lock to anchor the computer  
to a desk or other large object  
PCcardlock A PC card can be secured by the PC card lock fixed with a  
lock screw in the PC card lock screw hole.  
SlimSelectBaylock Slim Select Bay module can be secured by Slim Select Bay  
lock fixed with a lock screw in the lock position. The lock  
screw is inserted in the unlock position when purchased.  
Software  
Standard Windows XP Professional operating system and  
TOSHIBA Utilities and drivers preinstalled on the hard  
disk.  
Plug and Play When you connect an external device to the computer,  
Plug and Play capability enables the system to recognize  
the connection and make the necessary configurations  
automatically.  
Special features  
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are advanced  
features, which make the computer more convenient to use.  
TOSHIBAConsole Press this button to launch an application automatically.  
button The default is TOSHIBA Console.  
TOSHIBA Press this button to change internal display, external  
Presentation button display, simultaneous display, or multi-monitor display.  
Hot keys Key combinations let you quickly modify the system  
configuration directly from the keyboard without running a  
system configuration program.  
Displayautomatic This feature automatically cuts off power to the internal  
poweroff display when there is no input from the keyboard or  
pointing device for a time specified. Power is restored  
when any key is pressed or when there is input from a  
pointing device. You can specify the time in the Turn off  
monitor item of the Power Save Mode window in  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
HDDautomatic This feature automatically cuts off power to the hard disk  
poweroff drive when it is not accessed for a time specified. Power is  
restored when the hard disk is accessed. You can specify  
the time in the Turn off hard disks item of the Power Save  
ModewindowinTOSHIBAPowerSaver.  
Systemautomatic This feature automatically shuts down the system in  
Standby/Hibernation standby mode or Hibernation mode when there is no input  
or hardware access for a time specified. You can specify  
the time and select either System Standby or System  
Hibernate in the System standby and System hibernate  
item of the Power Save Mode window in TOSHIBA Power  
Saver.  
Keypad overlay A ten-key pad is integrated into the keyboard. Refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, Keyboard, for  
instructions on using the keypad overlay.  
Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and user, are  
available to prevent unauthorized access to your com-  
puter.  
Instant security A hot key function blanks the screen and disables the  
computer providing data security.  
Intelligent A microprocessor in the computer’s intelligent power  
power supply supply detects the battery’s charge and calculates the  
remaining battery capacity. It also protects electronic  
components from abnormal conditions, such as voltage  
overload from an AC adaptor. You can monitor remaining  
battery capacity. Use the Battery remaining item of the  
Power Save Modes window in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Battery save mode This feature lets you save battery power. You can specify  
the Power Save Mode in the Running on batteries item of  
the Power Save Modes window in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Panel power off/on This feature turns power to the computer off when the  
display panel is closed and turns it back on when the panel  
is opened. You can specify the setting in the When I close  
the lid item of the System Power Mode window in  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver.  
Low battery When battery power is exhausted to the point that  
automatic hibernation computer operation cannot be continued, the system  
automatically enters Hibernation and shuts down. You can  
specify the setting in the Battery Alarm item of the Alarm  
windowinTOSHIBAPowerSaver.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities  
Heat dispersal The CPU has an internal temperature sensor that automati-  
cally activates cooling procedures. Refer to the Heat  
dispersal section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for  
details on setting the options for cooling methods.  
Hibernation This feature lets you turn off the power without exiting  
from your software. The contents of main memory is saved  
to the hard disk, when you turn on the power again, you  
can continue working right where you left off. Refer to the  
Turning off the power section in Chapter 3, Getting  
Started, for details.  
Standby If you have to interrupt your work, you can turn off the  
power without exiting from your software. Data is main-  
tained in the computer’s main memory. When you turn on  
the power again, you can continue working right where  
you left off.  
Utilities  
This section describes preinstalled utilities and tells how to start them. For details  
on operations, refer to each utility’s online manual, help files or read.me files.  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver To access this power savings management program, open  
the Control Panel and select the TOSHIBA Power Saver  
icon.  
HW Setup This program lets you customize your hardware settings  
according to the way you work with your computer and  
the peripherals you use. To start the utility, click the  
Windows Start button and click Control Panel. In the  
Control Panel, select the TOSHIBA HW Setup icon.  
TOSHIBAControls This utility has four sections to let you do the following:  
• Buttons: Assign applications to the Internet button  
(default setting is the browser) and to the TOSHIBA  
Console button (default setting is the TOSHIBA  
Console).  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Fn-esse This Windows program lets you define your own “short-  
cut” keys to quickly launch applications and speed your  
work in Windows. To start the utility, click the Windows  
Start button, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA  
Utilities and click Fn-esse.  
DVDVideoPlayer The DVD Video Player is used to play DVD-Video. It has  
an on-screen interface and functions. Click Start, point to  
AllPrograms, pointtoInterVideoWinDVD4, thenclick  
InterVideoWinDVD4.  
BluetoothTOSHIBA This software enables communication between remote  
Stack Bluetooth devices. Refer to the Quick Start Guide.  
Drag’nDropCD This easy-to-use software lets you record CDs with just a  
few mouse clicks. You can create CDs in several formats  
including audio CDs that can be played on a standard  
stereo CD player and data CDs to store the files and  
folders on your hard drive. This software can be used on a  
modelwithCD-RW/DVD-ROMdriveorDVDMultidrive.  
TOSHIBAMobile This utility enables hot insertion of Slim Select Bay  
Extension modules, that is, you can remove/insert Slim Select Bay  
modules while the computer is on. To activate this utility,  
selectTOSHIBAMobileExtensionfromTOSHIBA  
Console.  
ConfigFree ConfigFree is a suite of utilities to allow easy control of  
communication device and network connections.  
ConfigFree also allows you to find communication  
probrems and create profiles for easy switching between  
location and communication networks.  
You can boot ConfigFree from the menu bar as follows.  
Windows2000: [Start]-[Programs]-[TOSHIBAConfigFree]-[ConfigFree]  
Windows XP: [Start]-[AllPrograms]-[TOSHIBAConfigFree]-[ConfigFree]  
TOSHIBADual This utility has the following functions:  
PointingDeviceutility To disable/enable TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device with  
Fn + F9 keys.To customize the functions of TOSHIBA  
Dual Pointing Device easily.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
TOSHIBABrightness The brightness of LCD is automatically controlled by  
Sensor Control Brightness Sensor. However, you can compensate the  
brightness using TOSHIBA Brightness Sensor Control. In  
order to use TOSHIBA Brightness Sensor Control, you have  
to set Brightness Sensor in TOSHIBA Power Saver to ON.  
Options  
You can add a number of options to make your computer even more powerful  
and convenient to use. The following options are available:  
Memoryexpansion A128,256,512or1,024MBmemorymodule(PC2100DDR)  
can easily be installed in the computer.  
Battery pack An additional battery pack can be purchased from your  
TOSHIBA dealer. Use it as a spare or replacement.  
AC adaptor If you use your computer at more than one site frequently,  
it may be convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor  
for each site so you will not have to carry the adaptor with  
you.  
Battery charger The battery charger lets you charge extra batteries outside  
the computer.  
Securitylock A slot is available to attach a security cable to the com-  
puter to deter theft.  
USBFDDKit A 3 1/2" diskette drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or  
720-kilobyte diskette. It connects to a USB port. (You  
cannot format 720-kilobyte diskettes on Windows XP, but  
you can use previously formatted disks.)  
Advanced Port The Advanced Port Replicator II provides the ports  
ReplicatorII available on the computer in addition to separate PS/2  
mouse and PS/2 keyboard ports, a digital visual interface  
(DVI)port,line-injackandline-outjack.  
Harddiskdrive You can increase your computer’s data storage capacity  
with additional hard disk drives. They are available in the  
followingsizes:  
• 30billionbytes(27.94GB)  
• 40billionbytes(37.26GB)  
• 60billionbytes(55.88GB)  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Securityplate This device covers the bottom of the computer when it is  
connected to a Advanced Port Replicator II to prevent  
removal of components.  
WirelessLANKit This option enbles wireless LAN functions in computers  
that do not have wireless preinstalled. It is installed by  
dealers only. Two types of Wireless LAN kit are prepared:  
WirelessLANKitforIEEE802.11Standard(RevisionB)  
andWirelessLANKitforIEEE802.11Standard(Revision  
A and B)  
BluetoothKit This option enbles Bluetooth wireless communications in  
computers that do not have Bluetooth preinstalled. It is  
installed by dealers only.  
Slim Select Bay options  
The following modules can be installed in the Slim Select Bay. All other modules are  
options.  
CD-ROM Refer to the Features section for details.  
DVD-ROM Refer to the Features section for details.  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM Refer to the Features section for details.  
DVDMulti Refer to the Features section for details.  
SlimSelectBay An adaptor lets you install an optional HDD described  
HDD adaptor in Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Harddiskdrive You can increase your computer’s data storage capacity  
withanadditional30billionbytes(27.94GB),40billion  
bytes(37.26GB)and60billionbytes(55.89GB)harddisk  
driveintheSlimSelectBayHDDadaptor.  
SlimSelectBay The secondary battery increases your computer’s battery  
2nd battery pack power and operating time when a main battery is also  
installed.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
The Grand Tour  
This chapter identifies the various components of your computer. Become familiar  
with each component before you operate the computer.  
Front with the display closed  
Figure 2-1 shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the closed position.  
INFRARED MICROPHONE  
PORT JACK  
HEADPHONE  
JACK  
VOLUME  
CONTROL  
DISPLAY  
LATCH  
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SWITCH  
SYSTEM INDICATORS  
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display closed  
Infrared port This infrared port is compatible with Infrared Data Associa-  
tion (IrDA 1.1) standards. It enables cableless 4 Mbps,  
1.15Mbps, 115.2kbps, 57.6kbps, 38.4kbps, 19.2kbpsor  
9.6kbpsdatatransferwithIrDA1.1compatibleexternal  
devices.  
Microphone jack A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables connection of a  
three-conductor mini jack for monaural microphone input.  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Headphone jack This jack lets you connect digital speakers or stereo  
headphones (16 ohm minimum). When you connect digital  
speakers or headphones, the internal speaker is automati-  
callydisabled.  
Volume control Use this dial to adjust the volume of the stereo speakers  
and subwoofer or the stereo headphones.  
Display latch This latch secures the LCD panel in its closed position.  
Slide the latch to open the display.  
Wireless Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless LAN and  
communication Bluetooth functions. Slide it to the right to turn on the  
switch functions (Wireless model or Wireless LAN ready model  
only).  
Off On  
System LEDs let you monitor the status of various computer  
indicators functions. Details are given in the Indicators section.  
Left side  
Figure 2-2 shows the computer’s left side.  
PC CARD SLOTS  
SD CARD INDICATOR  
SD CARD SLOT  
PC CARD LOCK  
SECURITY LOCK  
USB PORT 1, 2  
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Left side  
PC card slot A PC card slot can accommodate two 5 mm Type IIcards or  
one Type III card. You can install any industry standard  
PC card such as a SCSI adaptor, Ethernet adaptor or flash  
memorycard.  
1
CB  
0
CAUTION: Keep foreign objects out of the PC card slot. A pin or similar  
object can damage the computer’s circuitry.  
SD card indicator This indicator glows green when the computer is access-  
ing the SD card slot.  
SD card slot SD cards are used in a wide variety of external devices.  
This slot lets you transfer data from the device to your  
computer. An indicator on the left side of the slot glows  
when a card is being accessed.  
CAUTION: Keep foreign objects out of the SD card slot. A pin or similar  
object can damage the computer’s circuitry.  
PC card lock Slide this lock to release or secure PC cards.  
Security lock A security cable attaches to this slot. The optional security  
cable anchors your computer to a desk or other large  
object to deter theft.  
Universal Two Universal Serial Bus ports are on the left side. The  
Serial Bus ports comply with the USB 2.0 standard, which enables  
(USB2.0)ports data transfer speeds 40 times faster than the USB 1.1  
standard. (The ports also support USB 1.1.)  
CAUTION: Keep foreign objects out of the USB connectors. A pin or  
similar object can damage the computer’s circuitry.  
NOTE: Operation of all functions of all USB devices has not been  
confirmed. Some functions might not execute properly.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Right side  
Figure 2-3 shows the computer’s right side.  
USB PORT 3  
SLIM SELECT BAY  
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer  
Universal A third Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0 compliant) port is on  
Serial Bus the right side. See Universal Serial Ports in the Left side  
(USB 2.0) port section for details.  
However, the USB port 3 does not support USB KB/  
MouseandUSBFDDLegacyEmulation.  
Slim Select Bay ACD-ROMdrive,DVD-ROMdrive,CD-RW/DVD-ROM  
drive, DVDMultidrive, SlimSelectBayHDDadaptoror  
Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack can be installed in the  
Slim Select Bay. A weight saver can be installed when  
there is no module.  
Back side  
Figure 2-4 shows the computer’s back panel.  
EXTERNAL MONITOR  
PORT  
SERIAL  
PORT  
PARALLEL LANACTIVE  
LINK INDICATOR  
PORT  
INDICATOR (ORANGE) (GREEN)  
DC IN 15V VIDEO-OUT JACK  
MODEN LAN I.LINK (IEEE 1394) COOLING  
JACK  
JACK PORT  
VENTS  
Figure 2-4 The back side of the computer  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Back side  
External monitor This 15-pin port lets you connect an external video  
port display.  
Serial port Use this 9-pin port to connect external serial devices such  
as an external modem, a serial mouse or printer.  
Parallel port This Centronics-compatible, 25-pin parallel port is used to  
connect a parallel printer or other parallel device. This port  
supports Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) standard.  
LAN jack This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor has  
built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second,  
Ether  
10BASE-T), FastEthernetLAN(100megabitspersecond,  
100BASE-Tx)andGigabitEthernetLAN (1000megabits  
per second, 1000BASE-T). The LAN has two indicators.  
See Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for details.  
LAN active This indicator glows orange when data is being exchanged  
indicator (orange) between the computer and the LAN.  
Link indicator This indicator glows green when the computer is connect-  
(green) ed to a LAN and the LAN is functioning properly.  
DC IN 15V The AC adaptor connects to this socket. Use only the  
model of AC adaptor that comes with the computer. Using  
the wrong adaptor can damage your computer.  
DC IN 15V  
Video-out jack Plug an S-Video cable into this jack for video-out. The S-  
Video cable carries video signal.  
Modem jack In areas where an internal modem is installed as standard  
equipment, there is a modem jack that lets you use a  
modular cable to connect the modem directly to a tele-  
phone line.  
CAUTIONS: 1. In case of a lightning storm, unplug the modem cable  
from the telephone jack.  
2. Do not connect the modem to a digital telephone line.  
A digital line will damage the modem.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
i.LINK(IEEE1394) Connect an external device, such as a digital video camera  
port to this port for high-speed data transfer.  
Coolingvents Cooling vents help CPU keep from overheating.  
CAUTION: Do not to block the cooling vents. Also do not to keep  
foreign objects out of them. A pin or similar object can damage the  
computer’s circuitry.  
Underside  
Figure 2-5 shows the underside of the computer. Make sure the display is closed  
before turning over your computer.  
SLIM SELECT SLIM SELECT  
NOTCHES  
BAY  
BAY LOCK  
DOCKING  
INTERFACE  
COOLING  
FAN  
PC CARD  
LOCK  
SCREW  
HOLE  
BATTERY PACK  
SLIM SELECT BAY  
LOCK SCREW  
BATTERY LOCK HDD PACK COVER SCREW  
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Under side  
Slim Select Bay See the Right side section in this chapter for details.  
Slim Select Bay Slide the lock to release or secure the Slim Select Bay  
lock ejector.  
CAUTION: Be sure to lock the Slim Select Bay lock before you transport  
or carry the computer.  
Slim Select Bay One screw secures the Slim Select Bay lock.  
lockscrew  
Docking interface This port enables connection of an optional Advanced  
port Replicator II described in Chapter 8 Optional Devices.  
CAUTION: Keep foreign objects out of the docking interface port. A pin  
or slimilar object can damage the computer's circurity. A plastic shutter  
protects the connentor.  
Notches Notchees on the computer engage hooks on the  
Advanced port Replicator II to hold the connection  
securely.  
Battery pack The battery pack powers the computer when the AC  
adaptor is not connected. For detailed information on the  
battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes.  
Battery lock Slide this lock to release the battery pack for removal.  
HDDpack One screw secures the HDD cover.  
cover screw  
PC card lock Insert a screw shorter than 4 mm in this hole after sliding  
screw hole the PC card lock. It secures the PC card lock.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Front with the display open  
This section shows the computer with the display open. Refer to the appropriate  
illustrationfordetails.  
DISPLAY HINGE  
DISPLAY SCREEN  
TOSHIBACONSOLE BUTTON  
LCD SENSOR SWITCH  
(NOT SHOWN)  
TOSHIBAPRESENTATION  
BUTTON  
STEREO SPEAKER  
(RIGHT)  
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR  
ACCUPOINT  
ACCUPOINT  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
STEREO SPEAKER  
(LEFT)  
POWER BUTTON  
TOUCH PAD  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
MICROPHONE  
TOUCH PAD  
Figure 2-6 The front of the Touch Pad model with the display open  
Figure 2-6 shows the front of the computer with the display open. To open the  
display, push the display latch on the front of the display and lift up. Position the  
display at a comfortable viewing angle.  
Display hinge The display hinge holds the display screen at easy-to-  
view angles.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front with the display open  
Displayscreen The LCD displays high-contrast text and graphics. The  
computer’sLCDconsistsofupto1024x768pixelsor1400  
x1050pixels.RefertoAppendixB.  
When the computer operates on the AC adaptor the  
display screen’s image will be somewhat brighter than  
when it operates on battery power. The lower brightness  
level is intended to save battery power.  
TOSHIBAConsole Press this button to launch an application automatically.  
button The default is TOSHIBA Console.  
TOSHIBA Press this button to change internal display, simultaneous  
Presentationbutton display,ormulti-monitordisplay.  
The default setting is the simultaneous display on LCD and  
CRT with resolution of 1024 X 768. When you press this  
button twice, the display mode returns to single display on  
LCDonly. Settingofmulti-monitordisplayinWindowsXP,  
PC changes its display mode to the multi-monitor display  
on LCD and CRT. You can also return to single display by  
pressing this button twice.  
The setting of TOSHIBA Presentation button can be  
changed through the property of TOSHIBA Console.  
Display mode is changed to the multi-monitor display by  
selecting "Different Image" (Windows XP only) or to the  
simultaneous display on internal and external display by  
selecting "Same Image".  
Stereo speakers The speakers emit sound generated by your software as  
well as audio alarms, such as low battery condition,  
generated by the system.  
AccuPoint A pointer control device located in the center of the  
keybord is used to control the on-screen pointer. Refer to  
the Using the AccuPoint section in Chapter 4, Operating  
Basics.  
AccuPoint Control buttons below the keybord let you select menu  
controlbuttons items or manipulate text and graphics designated by the  
on-screen pointer.  
Power button Press the power button to turn the computer’s power on  
and off.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Touch Pad A Touch Pad located in the center of the palm rest is used  
to control the on-screen pointer. Refer to the Using the  
Touch Pad section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Touch Pad Control buttons below the Touch Pad let you select menu  
controlbuttons items or manipulate text and graphics designated by the  
on-screen pointer.  
Microphone A built-in microphone lets you record sound into your  
applications. Refer to the Using the microphone section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
BrightnessSensor The Brightness sensor adjusts the brightness of LCD to  
the adequate brightness according to the illuminance of  
the place where you are using the PC.  
NOTE: The Brightness Sensor automatically adjusts the brightness of  
LCD display. However, you can compensate the brightness using  
TOSHIBA Brightness Sensor Control. If the compensated brightness still  
does not fit to the condition to use, adjust the brightness manually using  
Fn + F6/7 keys with TOSHIBA Power Saver set to OFF. Refer to Chapter  
5 for details.  
LCDSensorswitch This switch senses when the LCD panel is closed or  
opened and activates the Panel Power Off/On feature.  
When you close the panel the computer enters  
Hibernation mode and shuts down. When you open the  
panel the computer starts in Hibernation mode. Use the  
TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility to enable or disable this  
features. The defauls is “enabled.” Refer to the TOSHIBA  
PowerSaverUtilityandPanelPowerOff/Onitemsin  
Chapter 1, Introduction, for details on settings.  
CAUTION: Do not put a magnetic object close to the switch. The  
computer will automatically enter Hibernation mode and shut down  
even if the Panel Power Off features is disabled.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System indicators  
System indicators  
LEDs beneath icons, light when various computer operations are in progress.  
DC IN 15V POWER  
BATTERY  
DISK  
SLIM SELECT WIRELESS  
BAY COMMNICATION  
Figure 2-7 System indicators  
DC IN 15V The DC IN 15V indicator glows in green when DC power  
is supplied from the AC power adaptor. If the adaptor’s  
output voltage is abnormal or if the power supply malfunc-  
tions, this indicator flashes orange.  
Power The Power indicator glows in green when the computer is  
on. If you select Standby from Shut Down Windows,  
this indicator flashes orange (one second on, two seconds  
off) while the computer shuts down.  
Battery The Battery indicator shows the condition of the  
battery’s charge: Green indicates full charge, orange  
indicates battery charging and flashing orange indicates a  
low battery charge. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-  
Up Modes.  
Disk The Disk indicator glows green when the computer is  
accessing the built-in hard disk.  
Slim Select Bay The Slim Select Bay indicator glows in green when the  
computerisaccessingaCD-ROMdrive,DVD-ROMdrive,  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive,DVDMultidrive,orSlimSelect  
Bay HDD adaptor in the Slim Select Bay. When the  
secondary battery is in the Slim Select Bay, the Slim Select  
Bay indicator glows as follows:  
green : fully charged  
orange : charging the battery  
Wireless This LED glows in orange when the Bluetooth and  
commnication wireless LAN functions are on.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Keyboard indicators  
The figures below show the positions of the keypad overlay indicators and the  
CapsLockindicator.  
When the F10 key indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you control the cursor.  
When the F11 key indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you enter numbers.  
NUMERIC MODE  
INDICATOR  
ARROW MODE  
INDICATOR  
Figure 2-8 Keypad overlay indicators  
When the CapsLock indicator glows the keyboard is in all-caps mode.  
CAPSLOCK  
INDICATOR  
Figure 2-9 CapsLock indicator  
CapsLock This indicator glows green when the alphabet keys are  
locked in uppercase.  
Arrow mode When the Arrow mode indicator lights green, you can  
use the keypad overlay (gray labeled keys) as cursor keys.  
Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB diskette drive  
Numeric mode You can use the keypad overlay (gray labeled keys) for  
numeric input when the Numeric mode indicator lights  
green. Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5,  
The Keyboard.  
USB diskette drive  
A 3 1/2" diskette drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte diskettes. It  
connects to the USB port.  
DISK-IN-USE  
INDICATOR  
DISKETTE SLOT  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 2-10 USB diskette drive  
Disk-In-Use This indicator lights when the diskette is being accessed.  
Indicator  
Disketteslot Insert a diskette in this slot.  
Ejectbutton When a diskette is fully seated in the drive, the eject  
button pops out. To remove a diskette, push in the eject  
button and the diskette pops out partially for removal.  
CAUTION: Check the Disk-In-Use indicator when you use the diskette  
drive. Do not press the eject button or turn off the computer while the light is  
glowing. Doing so could destroy data and damage the diskette or the drive.  
NOTES: 1. The external diskette drive should be placed on a flat,  
horizontal surface when in use. Do not set the drive on an  
incline greater than 20o while it is operating.  
2. Do not set anything on top of the diskette drive.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Slim Select Bay modules  
TheSlimSelectBaycanaccommodatethefollowingmodules:CD-ROMdrive,DVD-  
ROMdrive,CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive,DVDMultidrive, optionalsecondary  
battery pack and optional Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor.  
CD-ROM drive  
Anoptionalfull-size,maximum24-speedCD-ROMdrivemoduleletsyouruneither  
12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") compact discs without using an adaptor. It may be  
selected as a standard component or as an option.  
This drive supports the following formats:  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
• CD-R(readonly)  
• CD-RW(readonly)  
CD-IN-USE  
INDICATOR  
EJECT HOLE  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 2-11 The CD-ROM drive  
Ejectbutton Press the eject button to open the drawer partially.  
Eject hole Insert a slender object to open the drawer when the power  
to the computer is off.  
CD-In-Use This indicator lights when the CD is being  
Indicator accessed.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay modules  
CAUTION: Check the Slim Select Bay indicator when you use the  
CD-ROM drive. Do not press the eject button, disconnect a drive or turn  
off the computer while the light is glowing. Doing so could damage the  
CD or the drive.  
DVD-ROM drive  
Anoptionalfull-sizeDVD-ROMdrivemoduleletsyouruneither12cm(4.72")or8  
cm (3.15") digital video disc/compact disc without using an adaptor. It may be  
selected as a standard component or as an option.  
NOTE: The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the  
outer edge. The minimum (center) and maximum (outer edge) for DVDs  
and CDs are:  
DVD  
CD  
8-speed(maximum)  
24-speed(maximum)  
This drive supports the following formats:  
• DVDROM  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• DVDVideo  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
• CD-R(readonly)  
• CD-RW(readonly)  
CD/DVD-IN-USE  
INDICATOR  
EJECT HOLE  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 2-12 The DVD-ROM drive  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Ejectbutton Press the eject button to open the drawer partially.  
Eject hole Insert a slender object to open the drawer when the power  
to the computer is off.  
CD/DVD-In-Use This indicator lights when the CD/DVD is being  
Indicator accessed.  
CAUTION: Check the Slim Select Bay indicator when you use the  
DVD-ROM drive. Do not press the eject button, disconnect a drive or turn  
off the computer while the light is glowing. Doing so could damage the  
DVD/CD or the drive.  
DVD drives and media are manufactured according to the specifications of six  
marketing regions. When you purchase DVD-Video media, make sure it matches  
your drive, otherwise it will not play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central America, South  
America,Caribbean  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea, Mongolia  
China  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive  
Thefull-sizeCD-RW/DVD-ROMdrivemoduleletsyourecorddatatorewritable  
CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an  
adaptor. The computer is configured with either a DVD-ROM drive or CD-RW/  
DVD-ROMdrive.  
DVD read 8speed(maximum)  
CD read 24speed(maximum)  
CD-Rwrite 8speed(maximum)  
CD-RW write 8speed(maximum)  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay modules  
CD/DVD-IN-USE  
INDICATOR  
EJECT HOLE  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 2-13 The CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive  
This drive supports the following formats:  
• DVDROM  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• DVDVideo  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• CD-Text  
CD-R  
• CD-RW  
CD/DVD-In-Use This indicator lights when the CD/DVD is being  
Indicator accessed.  
Eject hole Insert a slender object to open the drawer when the power  
to the computer is off.  
Ejectbutton Press the eject button to open the drawer partially.  
CAUTION: Check the Slim Select Bay indicator when you use the  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive. Do not press the eject button, disconnect a  
drive or turn off the computer while the light is glowing. Doing so could  
damage the CD/DVD or the drive.  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drives and media are manufactured according to the specifica-  
tions of six marketing regions. When you purchase DVD-Video media, make sure it  
matches your drive, otherwise it will not play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central America, South  
America,Caribbean  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea, Mongolia  
China  
CD-R describes compact discs that can be written only once. The recorded data  
cannot be erased or changed. Use 8-speed CD-R discs.  
CD-RW describes compact discs that can be recorded more than once. Use either 1,  
2, or 4 multi speed CD-RW discs or high-speed 4- to 10-speed discs. The write  
speed of the high-speed CD-RW discs is maximum 8-speed.  
Use Drag’n Drop CD to write compact discs.  
DVD Multi drive  
The full-size DVD Multi drive module lets you record data to rewritable CD/DVDs as  
well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.  
An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the  
computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows and the Slim  
Select Bay indicator glows.  
CAUTION: Check the Slim Select Bay indicator when you use the  
DVD Multi drive. Do not press the eject button, disconnect a drive or  
turn off the computer while the light is glowing. Doing so could damage  
the CD/DVD or the drive.  
NOTE: The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at outer  
edge.  
DVD read 8speed(maximum)  
DVD-R write 1 speed  
DVD-RW write 1 speed  
DVD-RAMwrite 2 speed  
CD read 24speed(maximum)  
CD-Rwrite 16speed(maximum)  
CD-RW write 8speed(maximum)  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay modules  
CD/DVD-IN-USE  
INDICATOR  
EJECT HOLE  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 2-14 The DVD Multi drive  
CD/DVD-In-Use This indicator lights when a CD/DVD is being accessed.  
Indicator  
Ejectbutton Press the eject button to open the drawer partially.  
Eject hole Insert a slender object to open the drawer when the power  
to the DVD Multi drives is off.  
This drive supports the following formats:  
• DVDROM  
DVD-R  
• DVD-RAM  
• CD-EXTRA  
• Audio CD  
• CD-DA  
• DVDVideo  
• DVD-RW  
• CD-ROM  
• Photo CD  
• CD-ROMxA  
• CD-I  
• CD-Text  
CD-R  
• CD-RW  
DVD Multi drives and disc are manufactured according to the specifications of six  
marketing regions. When you purchase DVD-Video media, make sure it matches  
your drive, otherwise it will not play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central America, South  
America,Caribbean  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea, Mongolia  
China  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
NOTE: Use the WinDVD 4 application to view DVD-Video discs.  
CD-R and DVD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be  
erased or changed.  
CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once. Use either 1, 2, or 4 multi speed CD-  
RW discs or high-speed 4- to 10-speed discs. The write speed of the high-speed  
CD-RWdiscsismaximum10-speed.  
DVD-RW/-RAM discs can be recorded more than once.  
For information on loading and unloading discs, refer to the Using optical media  
drives section in this manual.  
Secondary battery pack  
An optional battery pack can be installed in the Slim Select Bay to increase the  
computer’s battery power and operating time. For details, refer to the documenta-  
tion accompanying the secondary battery pack. Refer to Chapter 8, Optional  
Devices, for details on installing a secondary battery pack.  
Figure 2-15 The secondary battery pack  
Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor  
You can increase your computer’s data storage capacity by installing an optional  
integrated, 21/2"HDDintheSlimSelectBay.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay modules  
To install an HDD, follow the steps below.  
1. Slide the cover lock to the unlock position and lift up the cover.  
2. Lay the HDD into the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor and push it forward to  
secure the connectors.  
3. Close the cover.  
Unlock  
Lock  
Figure 2-16 The Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor  
4. Slide the cover lock to the lock position.  
Weight saver module  
Installing a weight saver module in the Slim Select Bay lets you reduce the carrying  
weight of the computer.  
Figure 2-17 The weight saver module  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
AC adaptor  
The AC adaptor converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied  
to the computer. It can automatically adjust to any voltage from 100 to 240 volts and  
to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use the computer in almost  
any country/region.  
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source and the  
computer. See Chapter 6 Power and Power-Up Modes for details.  
Figure 2-18 The AC adaptor  
CAUTION: Use only the AC adaptor that came with the computer or an  
equivalent optional adaptor. Use of the wrong adaptor could damage  
your computer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage in such  
case.  
WARNING: Use only the AC adaptor supplied as an accessory. Other  
AC adaptors have different voltage and terminal polarities and use of  
them may produce heat and smoke or even result in fine or rupture.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Getting Started  
This chapter provides basic information to get you started using your computer. It  
covers the following topics:  
Setting up your work space — for your health and safety  
NOTE: Be sure also to read Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort.  
This guide, which is included with the computer, explains product  
liability.  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Opening the display  
Turning on the power  
Windows XP/2000 setup  
Turning off the power  
Restarting the computer  
Restoring the preinstalled software from the Product Recovery CD-ROM  
NOTE: All users should be sure to read the section Windows XP/2000  
setup.  
Setting up your work space  
Establishing a comfortable work site is important for you and your computer. A  
poor work environment or stressful work habits can result in discomfort or serious  
injury from repetitive strain to your hands, wrists or other joints. Proper ambient  
conditions should also be maintained for the computer’s operation. This section  
discusses the following topics:  
General conditions  
Placement of the computer  
Seating and posture  
Lighting  
Work habits  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
General conditions  
In general, if you are comfortable, so is your computer, but read the following to  
make sure your work site provides a proper environment.  
Make sure there is adequate space around the computer for proper ventilation.  
Make sure the AC power cord connects to an outlet that is close to the  
computer and easily accessible.  
The temperature should be 5 to 35 degrees Centigrade (41 to 95 degrees  
Fahrenheit) and the relative humidity should be 20 to 80 percent.  
Avoid areas where rapid or extreme changes in temperature or humidity may  
occur.  
Keep the computer free of dust, moisture, and exposure to direct sunlight.  
Keep the computer away from heat sources, such as electric heaters.  
Do not use the computer near liquids or corrosive chemicals.  
Do not place the computer near objects that create strong magnetic fields (e.g.,  
stereo speakers).  
Some computers in the computer, including data storage media, can be  
damaged by magnets. Do not place the computer near magnetic objects or  
bring magnetic objects close to the computer. Be careful of objects, such as  
stereo speakers, that produce strong magnetic fields during operation. Also, be  
careful with metal objects, such as bracelets, which can be inadvertently  
magnetized.  
Do not operate the computer in close proximity to a mobile phone.  
Leave ample ventilation room for the fan. Do not block the vents.  
Placement of the computer  
Position the computer and peripheral devices to provide comfort and safety.  
Set the computer on a flat surface at a comfortable height and distance. The  
display should be no higher than eye level to avoid eye strain.  
Place the computer so that it is directly in front of you when you work and  
make sure you have adequate space to easily operate other devices.  
Allow adequate space behind the computer to let you freely adjust the display.  
The display should be angled to reduce glare and maximize visibility.  
If you use a paper holder, set it at about the same height and distance as the  
computer.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up your work space  
Seating and posture  
The height of your chair in relation to the computer and keyboard as well as the  
support it gives your body are primary factors in reducing work strain. Refer to the  
following tips and to figure 3-1.  
BELOW EYE LEVEL  
90O ANGLES  
FOOT REST  
Figure 3-1 Posture and positioning of the computer  
Place your chair so that the keyboard is at or slightly below the level of your  
elbow. You should be able to type comfortably with your shoulders relaxed.  
Your knees should be slightly higher than your hips. If necessary, use a foot  
rest to raise the level of your knees to ease pressure on the back of your thighs.  
Adjust the back of your chair so it supports the lower curve of your spine.  
Sit straight so that your knees, hips and elbows form approximately 90 degree  
angles when you work. Do not slump forward or lean back too far.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Lighting  
Proper lighting can improve legibility of the display and reduce eye strain.  
Position the computer so that sunlight or bright indoor lighting does not reflect  
off the screen. Use tinted windows, shades or other screen to eliminate sun  
glare.  
Avoid placing the computer in front of bright light that could shine directly in  
your eyes.  
If possible, use soft, indirect lighting in your computer work area. Use a lamp to  
illuminate your documents or desk, but be sure to position the lamp so that it  
does not reflect off the display or shine in your eyes.  
Work habits  
A key to avoiding discomfort or injury from repetitive strain is to vary your activi-  
ties. If possible, schedule a variety of tasks into your work day. If you must spend  
long periods at the computer, finding ways to break up the routine can reduce  
stress and improve your efficiency.  
Sit in a relaxed posture. Good positioning of your chair and equipment as  
described earlier can reduce tension in your shoulders or neck and ease back  
strain.  
Vary your posture frequently.  
Occasionally stand up and stretch or exercise briefly.  
Exercise and stretch your wrists and hands a number of times during the day.  
Frequently, look away from the computer and focus your eyes on a distant  
object for several seconds, for example 30 seconds every 15 minutes.  
Take frequent short breaks instead of one or two long breaks, for example, two  
or three minutes every half hour.  
Have your eyes examined regularly and visit a doctor promptly, if you suspect  
you might be suffering from a repetitive strain injury.  
A number of books are available on ergonomics and repetitive strain injury or  
repetitive stress syndrome. For more information on these topics or for pointers on  
exercises for such stress points as hands and wrists, please check with your library  
or book vendor. Also refer to the computer’s Instruction Manual for Safety &  
Comfort.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to operate  
from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because the battery pack  
will need to be charged before you can operate from battery power.  
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100 to 240  
volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to charge the battery  
pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
WARNING: Use only the AC adaptor supplied as an accessory. Other  
AC adaptors have different voltage and terminal polarities and use of  
them may produce heat and smoke or even result in fine or rupture.  
CAUTION:  
1) Use only the AC adaptor supplied with your computer or an  
equivalant adaptor that is compatible. Use of any incompatible adaptor  
could damage your computer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any  
damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor.  
2) When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the  
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting  
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step  
otherwise the adoptor DC output plug could hold an electrical change  
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As a  
general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.  
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.  
Figure 3-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V input port on  
the back of the computer.  
Figure 3-3 Connecting the adaptor to the computer  
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet. The Battery and DC IN 15V  
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.  
Opening the display  
The display panel can be rotated in a wide range of angles for optimal viewing.  
1. Slide the display latch on the front of the computer to the right.  
2. Lift the panel up and adjust it to the best viewing angle for you.  
CAUTION: Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display  
panel. Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the  
computer.  
DISPLAY LATCH  
Figure 3-4 Opening the display  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning on the power  
Turning on the power  
This section describes how to turn on the power.  
NOTE: After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off  
until you have set up the operating system.  
1. Open the display.  
2. Press and hold the computer’s power button for two or three seconds.  
Figure 3-5 Turning on the power  
Windows XP/2000 setup  
When you first turn on the power, the computer’s initial screen is the Microsoft  
Windows XP Professional or Windows 2000 Startup Screen Logo.  
Follow the on-screen directions.  
Turning off the power  
The power can be turned off in one of the following modes: Shut down (Boot),  
Hibernation or Standby mode.  
Shut Down mode (Boot mode)  
When you turn off the power in Shut Down mode no data is saved and the  
computer will boot to the operating system’s main screen.  
1. If you have entered data, save it to the hard disk or to a diskette.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
2. Make sure all disk activity has stopped, then remove the CD/DVD-ROM or  
diskette.  
CAUTION: Make sure the Disk, Slim Select Bay and Slim Select Bay’s  
module indicators are off. If you turn off the power while a disk is being  
accessed, you can lose data or damage the disk.  
3. a. In Windows XP, click startthen click Turn Off Computer. From the  
Turn Off Computer menu select Turn Off.  
b. In Windows 2000, click startand clickShut Down. From theShut  
Down menu select Shut Down.  
4. Turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
CAUTION: Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait  
a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Hibernation mode  
The hibernation feature saves the contents of memory to the hard disk when the  
computer is turned off. The next time the computer is turned on, the previous state  
is restored. The hibernation feature does not save the status of peripheral devices.  
CAUTIONS: 1. Save your data. While entering hibernation mode, the  
computer saves the contents of memory to the HDD.  
However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data  
manually.  
2. Data will be lost if you remove the battery or discon-  
nect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait  
for the Disk indicator to go out.  
3. Do not install or remove a memory module while the  
computer is in hibernation mode. Data will be lost.  
Benefits of hibernation  
The hibernation feature provides the following benefits:  
Saves data to the hard disk when the computer automatically shuts down  
because of a low battery.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning off the power  
NOTE: For the computer to shut down in hibernation mode, the hiberna-  
tion feature must be enabled in two places in TOSHIBA Power Saver: the  
Hibernate window and the Battery Alarm item of the Alarm window.  
Otherwise, the computer will shut down in Standby mode. If battery power  
becomes depleted, data saved in Standby will be lost.  
You can return to your previous working environment immediately when you  
turn on the computer.  
Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no  
input or hardware access for the duration set by the System hibernate feature.  
You can use the panel power off feature.  
Starting Hibernation  
NOTE: You can also enable Hibernation by pressing Fn + F4. See  
Chapter 5, Keyboard, for details.  
To enter Hibernation mode, follow the steps below.  
Windows XP  
1. Click start.  
2. Select Turn Off Computer.  
3. Open the Turn Off Computer dialog box. Hibernateis not displayed.  
4. Press the Shift key. The Standbyitem will change to Hibernate.  
5. Select the Hibernate.  
Windows 2000  
1. Click startandclickShutDown.  
2. In Shut down Windowsselect Hibernate and click the OK button.  
Automatic Hibernation  
The computer will enter Hibernate mode automatically when you press the power  
button or close the lid. First, however, make the appropriate settings according to  
the steps below.  
1. Open the Control Panel.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
2. a. In Windows XP, open Performance and Maintenance and open  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
b. In Windows 2000, double-click the TOSHIBA Power Saver icon.  
3. Select the Hibernate window, select the Enable Hibernate support check  
box and click the Apply button.  
4. Select the Power Save Modes window.  
5. Double-click Power Mode (Full Power, Normal, etc.) and open the  
System Power Mode window.  
6. Enable the desired Hibernation settings for When I press the power  
button and When I close the lid.  
7. Click the OK button.  
Data save in hibernation mode  
When you turn off the power in hibernation mode, the computer takes a moment to  
save current memory data to the hard disk. During this time, the Disk indicator will  
light.  
After you turn off the computer and memory is saved to the hard disk, turn off the  
power to any peripheral devices.  
CAUTION: Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately.  
Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Standby mode  
In standby mode, the power remains on, but the CPU and all other devices are in  
sleep mode.  
NOTE: If the computer is not used or accessed in any way, including  
receipt of e-mail, for 30 minutes when the AC adaptor is connected, the  
computer will automatically enter Standby mode (TOSHIBA Power  
Saver default).  
· To restore operation, press the power button or press any key. The latter  
action works only if Wake-up on Keyboard is enabled in HW Setup.  
· If a network application is active when the computer automatically enters  
Standby, it might not be restored when the computer wakes up from standby.  
To prevent the computer from automatically entering standby mode, disable  
Standby in TOSHIBA Power Saver. Open the Standby setting. That action,  
however, will nullify the computer's Energy Star compliance.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning off the power  
Standby precautions  
Before entering Standby mode, be sure to save your data.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in standby  
mode. The computer or the module could be damaged.  
If you carry the computer on board an aircraft or into a hospital, be sure to shut  
down the computer in hibernation mode or in shutdown mode to avoid radio  
signalinterference.  
Benefits of standby  
The standby feature provides the following benefits:  
Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does hiberna-  
tion.  
Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no  
input or hardware access for the duration set by the System Standby feature.  
You can use the panel power off feature.  
Executing standby  
NOTE: You can also enable Standby by pressing Fn + F3. See Chapter  
5, Keyboard, for details.  
You can enter standby mode in one of three ways:  
1. a. InWindowsXP, click start, click TurnOffComputerandclick  
Stand by.  
b. InWindows2000, click start, clickShutDown, selectStandbyandclick  
OK.  
2. Close the display panel. This feature must be enabled. Refer to the System  
Power Mode item in Power Saver Utility discribed in the Control Panel.  
a. In Windows XP, open Performance and Maintenance and open  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
b. In Windows 2000, double-click the TOSHIBA Power Saver icon.  
3. Press the power button. This feature must be enabled. Refer to the System  
Power Mode item in Power Saver Utility discribed in the Control Panel.  
a. In Windows XP, open Performance and Maintenance and open  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
b. In Windows 2000, double-click the TOSHIBA Power Saver icon.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when you shut  
down the computer.  
NOTES: 1. When the computer is shut down in standby mode, the  
power indicator flashes orange.  
2. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you  
can lengthen the operating time by shutting down in  
hibernation mode. Standby mode consumes more power.  
Standby limitations  
Standby will not function under the following conditions:  
Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.  
Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Restarting the computer  
Certain conditions require that you reset the system. For example, if:  
You change certain computer settings.  
An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard  
commands.  
There are three ways to reset the computer system:  
1. a. In Windows XP, click startthen click Turn Off Computer. From the  
Turn Off Computer menu select Restart.  
b. In Windows 2000, click startand clickShut Down. From theShut  
Down menu select Restart.  
2. Press Ctrl + Alt + Del to display the Windows Task Manager, then  
select Shutdown and Restart.  
3. Select Restart from the Turn Off Computerwindow in the start  
menu.  
4. Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Wait 10 to 15  
seconds, then turn the power on again by pressing the power button.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restoring the preinstalled software  
Restoring the preinstalled software  
from the Product Recovery CD-ROM  
If preinstalled files are damaged, use the Product Recovery CD-ROM to restore  
them. To restore the operating system and all preinstalled software, follow the steps  
below.  
CAUTION: When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard  
disk will be reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Load the Product Recovery CD-ROM in the fixed optical media drive and turn  
off the computer’s power.  
2. Hold down the F12 key and turn on the power. When In Touch with  
Tomorrow TOSHIBAappears, release the F12 key.  
3. Use the left or right cursor key to select the CD-ROM icon in the display  
menu. For details, refer to the Boot priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Operating Basics  
This chapter gives information on basic operations including using the TOSHIBA  
Dual Pointing Devices, USB diskette drive, the microphone, the internal modem,  
wireless communication, LAN, and changing Slim Select Bay modules. It also  
provides tips on caring for your computer, diskettes and CD/DVDs.  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device  
The computer is equipped with a dual point system: a Touch Pad and an AccuPoint  
pointing stick.  
TOUCH PAD  
CONTROL  
BUTTONS  
ACCUPOINT  
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons  
Using the Touch Pad  
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your finger tip across it in the  
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.  
Two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a mouse pointer.  
Press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or graphics desig-  
nated by the pointer. Press the right button to display a menu or other function  
depending on the software you are using.  
NOTE: You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to  
those of the left button.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Click: Tap the Touch Pad once  
Double-click: Tap twice  
Drag and drop: Tap to select the material you want to move. Leave your  
finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and move the material.  
Using the AccuPoint  
To use the AccuPoint, simply push it with your finger tip in the direction you want  
to move the on-screen pointer.  
Two buttons above the Touch Pad work in the same way with the AccuPoint as  
they do with the Touch Pad. Refer to the Using the Touch Pad section for details.  
AccuPoint precautions  
Certain conditions can affect the on-screen pointer when using AccuPoint. For  
example, the pointer may travel contrary to AccuPoint operation or an error message  
mayappear,if  
You touch the AccuPoint during power-up.  
You apply constant, soft pressure during power-up.  
There is a sudden temperature change.  
Strong stress is applied to the AccuPoint.  
If an error message appears, reboot the computer. If an error message does not  
appear, wait a moment for the pointer to stop, then continue operation.  
Replacing the cap  
The AccuPoint cap is an expendable item that should be replaced after prolonged  
use. One spare AccuPoint cap is supplied with the computer.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the USB diskette drive  
1. To remove the AccuPoint cap, firmly pinch the cap and pull it straight up.  
Figure 4-2 Removing the AccuPoint cap  
2. Position a new cap on the peg and press it into place.  
NOTE: The peg is square, so be careful to align the cap’s square hole with  
the peg.  
Using the USB diskette drive  
A 3 1/2" diskette drive connects to the computer’s USB port. It accommodates 1.44-  
megabyte or 720-kilobyte diskettes. Refer to Chapter 2, Grand Tour, for more  
information.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Connecting 3 1/2" diskette drive  
To connect the drive, plug the diskette drive connector into a USB port. Refer to  
Figure4-3.  
CAUTION: Make sure the connector is right side up and properly  
aligned with the socket. Do not try to force the connection, doing so can  
damage the connecting pins.  
Figure 4-3 Connecting the USB diskette drive  
NOTE: If you connect the diskette drive after turning on the computer, it  
will take about 10 seconds for the computer to recognize the drive. Do  
not disconnect and reconnect before 10 seconds has elapsed.  
Disconnecting 3 1/2" diskette drive  
When you have finished using the diskette drive, follow the procedures below to  
disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the indicator light to go out to make sure all diskette activity has  
stopped.  
CAUTION: If you disconnect the diskette drive or turn off the power  
while the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage  
the diskette or the drive.  
2. Click the Safety Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
3. ClickDiskettedrive.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Slim Select Bay modules  
4. Pull the diskette drive connector out of the USB port.  
Changing Slim Select Bay modules  
This section explains how to change modules in the Slim Select Bay. The illustra-  
tionsshowreplacementoftheDVD-ROMdrivewiththeSlimSelectBayHDD  
adaptor. Therefore, the text refers to those modules. However, the procedures are  
thesameforanyofthemodules:CD-ROMdrive,DVD-ROMdrive,CD-RW/DVD-  
ROMdrive, DVDMultidrive, HDDadaptor, SlimSelectBay2ndbatterypackwith  
separate tray or weight saver.  
CAUTIONS: 1. To avoid injury, do not put your hand into the Slim  
Select Bay slot.  
2. Before removing or inserting a second battery pack,  
turn off the computer’s power.  
NOTE: The TOSHIBA Mobile Extension is preinstalled to support hot  
swapping under Windows. Refer to Chapter 1, Introduction for  
information on using this utility to change modules while the computer’s  
power is on.  
Removing a module  
Remove the DVD-ROM drive as described below.  
1. Check all disk indicators to make sure no disks are operating.  
2. Turn the computer upside down.  
CAUTION: Wait for all disk indicators to go out before you turn over the  
computer and do not lay the computer down gently. Shock can damage  
the HDD or other components.  
3. Remove the screw near the icon securing the Slim Select Bay.  
4. Make sure the screw in the Slim Select Bay lock is set in the hole for the unlock  
position.  
5. Slide the Slim Select Bay latch to the unlock position.  
6. Grasp the DVD-ROM drive and slide it out.  
CAUTION: The DVD-ROM drive and other Slim Select Bay modules can  
become hot with use. Be careful when removing the module.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
SLIM SELECT BAY  
LOCK  
SLIM SELECT BAY  
MODULE  
Figure 4-4 Removing the DVD-ROM drive  
Inserting a module  
Insert the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor as described below.  
1. Insert the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor in the computer as shown below and  
press until the ejector clicks.  
2. If you want to lock the Slim Select Bay module, set the Slim Select Bay lock  
screw in the hole for the lock position. The lock screw is inserted in the unlock  
position at the time of purchasing.  
LOCK  
SCREW  
LOCK POSITION  
SLIM SELECT BAY  
MODULE  
Figure 4-5 Inserting the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using optical media drives  
Using optical media drives  
The text and illustrations in this section refer primarily to the Fixed DVD-ROM drive.  
However, operation is the same for other optical drive in the Slim Select Bay. The  
full-sizedriveprovideshigh-performanceexecutionofCD/DVD-ROM-based  
programs.Youcanruneither12cm(4.72")or8cm(3.15")CD/DVDswithoutan  
adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When  
the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-ROM, an indicator on the drive glows and the  
SlimSelectBayindicatorglows.  
NOTE: Use the WinDVD 4 application to view DVD-Video discs.  
If you have a CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive, refer also to the Writing CDs section for  
precautions on writing to CDs.  
Loading discs  
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-6 to 4-10.  
1. a. When the power is on, press the DVD-ROM eject button to open the  
drawerslightly.  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 4-6 Pressing the DVD-ROM eject button  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
b. Pressing the eject button will not open the drawer when the DVD-ROM  
drive’s power is off. If the power is off, you can open the drawer by  
inserting a slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip  
into the eject hole just to the right of the eject button.  
Figure 4-7 Manual release with the eject hole  
2. Pinch the drawer gently and pull until it is fully opened.  
Figure 4-8 Pulling the drawer open  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using optical media drives  
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the drawer.  
Figure 4-9 Inserting a CD/DVD  
NOTE: When the drawer is fully opened, the edge of the computer will  
extend slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn  
the CD/DVD at an angle when you place it in the tray. After seating the  
CD/DVD, however, make sure it lies flat, as shown in figure 4-9.  
CAUTIONS: 1. Do not touch the laser lens. Doing so could cause  
misalignment.  
2. Do not keep foreign matter from entering the drive.  
Check the back edge of the tray to make sure it carries  
no debris before closing the drive.  
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into place. The  
CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with the spindle base.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
5. Push the center of the drawer to close it. Press gently until it locks into place.  
CAUTION: If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the drawer is  
closed, the CD/DVD might be damaged. Also, the drawer might not open  
fully when you press the eject button.  
Figure 4-10 Closing the DVD-ROM drawer  
Removing discs  
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-11.  
CAUTION: Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing  
the DVD-ROM drive. Wait for the Slim Select Bay indicator to go out  
before you open the drawer. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you  
open the drawer, wait for it to stop before you remove it.  
1. To pop the drawer partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull the  
drawer out until it is fully opened.  
CAUTIONS: 1. When the drawer pops open slightly, wait a moment to  
make sure the CD/DVD has stopped spinning before  
pulling the drawer fully open.  
2. Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the  
CD/DVD is spinning when you open the drawer, the  
CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and cause injury.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing CDs on CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive  
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the drawer so you can hold it.  
Hold the CD/DVD gently and lift it out.  
Figure 4-11 Removing a CD/DVD  
3. Push the center of the drawer to close it. Press gently until it locks into place.  
Writing CDs on CD-RW/DVD-ROM  
drive  
Depending on the type of drive installed, you may be able to write CDs. The CD-  
RW/DVD-ROM drive lets you write as well as read CD-ROMs. Observe the  
precautions in this section to ensure the best performance for writing CDs. For  
information on loading and unloading CDs refer to the Using optical media drive  
section.  
NOTE: CD-R discs can be written only once. CD-RW discs can be  
rewritten many times.  
Before writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite the data.  
WerecommendthefollowingmanufacturersofCD-RandCD-RWmedia.  
Media quality can affect write or rewrite success rates.  
CD-R: TAIYOYUDENCO.,LTD.  
MitsuiChemicalsInc.  
MITUBISHICHEMICALCORPORATION  
RICOHCo.,Ltd.  
HitachiMaxellLtd.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
CD-RW: MITUBISHICHEMICALCORPORATION  
RICOHCo.,Ltd.  
TOSHIBA has confirmed the operation of CD-R and CD-RW media of the  
manufacturers above. Operation of other media cannot be guaranteed.  
CD-RW can generally be rewritten about 1,000 times. However, the actual  
number of rewrites is affected by the quality of the media and the way it is  
used.  
Be sure to connect the universal AC adaptor when you write or rewrite.  
Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing software.  
Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load on the  
CPU.  
Operate the computer at full power. Do not use power-saving features.  
Do not write while virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish, then  
disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files  
automatically in the background.  
Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance HDD  
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.  
Write from the computer's HDD to the CD. Do not try to write from shared  
devices such as a LAN server or any other network device.  
Writing with software other than Drag'n Drop CD has not been confirmed.  
Therefore, operation with other software cannot be guaranteed.  
When writing or rewriting  
NotethefollowingwhenyouwriteorrewriteaCD-RorCD-RW.  
Always copy data from the HDD to the CD. Do not use cut-and-paste. The  
original data will be lost if there is a write error.  
Do not perform any of the following actions:  
• Operate the computer for any other function, including use of a mouse or  
Touch Pad, closing/opening the LCD panel.  
• Start a communication application such as a modem.  
• Apply impact or vibration to the PC.  
• Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:  
PCcard, SDcard, USBdevices, externaldisplay, i.LINKdevices, optical  
digital devices.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive  
• Use the CD/MP3 control buttons to reproduce music and voice.  
• Open the optical media drive.  
If the media is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors may  
occur.  
Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to vibration such  
as airplanes trains, or cars. Do not use an unstable surface such as a stand.  
Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away from the  
computer.  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive  
You can use the DVD Multi drive to write data to either CD-R/-RW or DVD-R/-RW/  
-RAM discs. The following applications for writing are supplied on CD-ROM:  
Drag'n Drop CD, licensed by Easy Systems Japan Ltd., and DigiOn Inc., MotionDV  
STUDIO,DVDfunSTUDIOandDVD-MovieAlbum,licensedbyMatsushitaElectric  
IndustrialCo.,Ltd.  
Important message  
BeforeyouwriteorrewritetoCD-R/-RWorDVD-R/-RW/-RAMdisc,readand  
follow all set-up and operating instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, the  
DVD Multi drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write or rewrite,  
lose data or incur other damage.  
Disclaimer  
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:  
Damage to any CD-R/-RW or DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc that may be caused by  
writing or rewriting with this product.  
Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R/-RW or DVD-R/-RW/-  
RAM disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product, or for  
any business profit loss or business interruption that may be caused by the  
change or loss of the recorded contents.  
Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or software.  
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you may  
experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or problems  
with hardware devices. Also, it is a good idea to make two or more copies of  
important data, in case of undesired change or loss of the recorded contents.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Read/write function chart  
Disc type  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RAM  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
Read  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Write  
Drag’n Drop CD*1  
DVDfunSTUDIO*1  
DVD-MovieAlbum*1  
DVD-Video*2  
Yes  
Yes  
DVD VR*2  
(DVD VideoRecoding)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
*1 Software supplied with the product can be used for writing to a disc.  
*2 Video format can be written.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive  
Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the following  
manufacturersofCD-R/-RWandDVD-R/-RW/-RAMdisc.However,inno  
event does TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any  
disc. Disc quality can affect write or rewrite success rates.  
CD-R: TAIYOYUDENCO.,LTD.  
MitsuiChemicalsInc.  
MITUBISHICHEMICALCORPORATION  
RICOHCo.,Ltd.  
HitachiMaxellLtd.  
CD-RW: MITUBISHICHEMICALCORPORATION  
RICOHCo.,Ltd.  
DVD-R: DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version  
2.0  
TAIYOYUDENCO.,LTD.  
PIONEERVIDEOCORPORATION  
MITSUBISHICHEMICALCORPORATION  
DVD-RW: DVD Specifications for Re-recordable Disc for Version 1.1  
VICTORCOMPANYOFJAPAN.LIMITED  
TDKCorporation  
DVD-RAM: DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0 or  
Version 2.1  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
If the disc is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors may  
occur. Be careful to check the disc for dirt or damage before you use it.  
The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW or DVD-RW/-RAM is affected by the  
quality of the disc and the way it is used.  
There are two types of DVD discs: authoring and general use discs. Do not use  
authoring discs. Only general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.  
You can use DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge and  
DVDRAM discs designed without a cartridge. You cannot use a disc with a 2.6  
GB single-sided capacity or 5.2 GB double-sided capacity.  
Other DVD-ROM drives for computers or other DVD players may not be able  
toreadDVD-R/-RWdiscs.  
You cannot add data to a DVD-R/-RW disc that has previously been written to.  
You cannot overwrite data that has been previously written to a DVD-RW disc.  
You cannot partially delete any data written to a DVD-RW disc.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Data written to a CD-R/DVD-R disc cannot be deleted either in whole or in part.  
Data deleted (erase) from a CD-RW and DVD-RW/-RAM disc cannot be  
recovered. Check the content of the disc carefully before you delete it. If  
multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be careful not to  
delete data from the wrong drive.  
In writing to a DVD-R/-RW disc, some disc space is required for file  
management, so you may not be able to write the full capacity of the disc.  
Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it will be filled with dummy data if  
the written data is less than about 1 GB. Even if you write only a small amount  
of data, it will take time to fill in the dummy data.  
Two types of DVD-R/-RW/-RAM discs are on the market: data and video. Use  
a video disc to store video data. You can use video discs on a DVD recorder as  
well as on your computer's DVD-ROM drive. You cannot use data discs on a  
DVDrecorder.  
DVD-RAM formatted by FAT32 cannot be read in Windows 2000 without  
DVD-RAMDriverSoftware.  
Before writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite data.  
When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be careful not  
to write to the wrong drive.  
Be sure to connect the universal AC adaptor before you write or rewrite.  
Before you enter standby/hibernation mode, be sure to finish DVD-RAM  
writing. WritingisfinishedifyoucanejectDVD-RAMmedia.  
Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing software.  
Do not run software such as a screen saver, which can put a heavy load on the  
CPU.  
Operate the computer in the full-power mode. Do not use power-saving  
features.  
Do not write while virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish, then  
disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files  
automatically in the background.  
Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance HDD  
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and data damage.  
Write from the computer's HDD to the CD/DVD. Do not try to write from shared  
devices such as a LAN server or any other network device.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive  
Writing with software other than Drag'n Drop CD, DVDfunSTUDIO and  
DVDMovieAlbumisnotrecommended.  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe/consider the following when you write or rewrite to a CD-R/-RW or  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAMdisc.  
Do not perform any of the following actions when writing or rewriting:  
• Operate the computer for any other function, including using a mouse or  
Touch Pad or closing/opening the LCD panel.  
• Start a communication application such as a modem.  
• Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
• Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:  
PCcard, SDcard, USBdevices, externaldisplay, i.LINKdevices, optical  
digital devices.  
• Use the Audio/Video control button to reproduce music or voice.  
• Open the DVD Multi drive  
Do not use standby/hibernation while writing or rewriting.  
Make sure writing or rewriting is completed before going into standby/  
hibernation. Writing is completed if you can open the DVD Multi drive tray.  
Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to vibration such  
as airplanes, trains, or cars. Do not use an unstable surface such as a stand.  
Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away from the  
computer.  
Always copy data from the HDD to the DVD-RAM. Do not use cut-and-paste.  
The original data will be lost if there is a write error.  
Drag’n Drop CD  
Note the following limitations when you use Drag'n Drop CD:  
DVD-Video cannot be created using Drag'n Drop CD.  
DVD-Audio cannot be created using Drag'n Drop CD.  
You cannot use Drag'n Drop CD's music CD function to record music to a  
DVD-R/-RWdisc.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Do not use the DISC Backup function of Drag'n Drop CD to copy DVD-Video  
and DVD-ROM with copyright protection, because the copy will not play  
correctly.  
DVD-RAM disc cannot be backed up with the DISC Backup function of Drag'n  
DropCD.  
YoucannotbackupaCD-ROMorCD-R/-RWtoDVD-R/-RWusingtheDISC  
Backup function of Drag'n Drop CD.  
YoucannotbackupDVD-ROM,DVD-VideoorDVD-R/-RWtoCD-R/-RW  
using the DISC Backup function of Drag'n Drop CD.  
Drag'n Drop CD cannot record in packet format.  
You might not be able to use the DISC backup function of Drag'n Drop CD to  
back up a DVD-R/-RW disc that was made with other software on a different  
DVD-R/-RWrecorder.  
Data Verification  
To verify that data is written or rewritten correctly, follow the steps below before  
youwriteorrewriteaDataCD/DVD.  
1. Right-click Data BOX and select Options to display the DATA DISC  
Optionwindow.  
2. Mark the Record and Verify check box and select Byte compare.  
3. Click the OK button.  
The “Record and Verify” function automatically checks whether data has been  
correctly recorded onto a CD/DVD. "Byte compare" compares the original data file  
with the data recorded on the CD/DVD and checks that the data completely  
matches.  
Video (DVD-R/-RW/-RAM)  
Note the following limitations when you write video to DVD:  
Wheninstalling,uninstallingorMotionDVSTUDIO,DVDfunSTUDIOor  
DVDMovieAlbum, the computer should be set to system administrator or  
equivalentprivilege.  
WhetherMotionDVSTUDIOandDVD-MovieAlbumuseNTSCorPALformat  
is determined when the application is installed. To change the format, you will  
havetoreinstallMotionDVSTUDIOandDVD-MovieAlbum.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Multi drive  
When Drag'n Drop or similar software is resident in the computer's memory, the  
DVD Multi drive locks. In this situation, other software cannot be used to write  
data to the disc.  
While you are editing DVD-R/-RW/-RAM, you can display previews.  
However, if an application other than WinDVD is running, the preview might  
not display properly. To ensure proper display of previews, do not start other  
applicationswhileyouareeditingDVD-R/-RW/-RAMdisc.  
Do not change the resolution or the number of screen colors while MotionDV  
STUDIO,DVDfunSTUDIOorDVD-MovieAlbumisrunning.  
Although the online manual and Help files indicate that JPEG files can be used,  
in fact, they cannot be used.  
8cm(3.15")DVD-R/-RWdiscscannotbeusewithDVDfunSTUDIO.  
DVDfunSTUDIOcannotmakeDVD-Audio,VideoCD,andminiDVD.  
DVD-R/-RWdiscscannotbewritteninVRformat.  
It may take several hours for DVDfunSTUDIO to convert video to MPEG  
format, and several hours more to save the MPEG file to a DVD Multi drive.  
In order to write to a DVD-RW disc that has already been written to using  
DVDfunSTUDIO, you will first have to delete all of the data with Drag'n Drop  
CDorsimilarsoftware.  
You will need at least 20 GB of empty hard disk space to write to a DVD-R/-RW  
disc.  
YoucannotrecordinDVD-VideoformatonaDVD-RAMdisc.  
YouwillneedtoformataDVD-RAMforUDF2.0usingaformattingtool, before  
youwritetoDVD-RAMusingDVD-MovieAlbum.  
You cannot edit DVD-RAM video data that has copyright protection, using  
DVD-MovieAlbum.  
You can add PAL format images only to a PAL type DVD-RAM and NTSC  
formatimagesonlytoanNTSC-typeDVD-RAM.  
You cannot convert a PAL format DVD-RAM to NTSC format or an NTSC type  
DVD-RAMtoPALformat.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD/DVDs and  
diskettes.  
Handle your media with care. The following simple precautions will increase the  
lifetime of your media and protect the data stored on them:  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD/DVDs in the container they came in to protect them and keep  
themclean.  
2. Do not bend the CD/DVD.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD/DVD that contains data.  
4. Hold the CD/DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole. Finger-  
prints on the surface can prevent the drive from properly reading data.  
5. Do not expose to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold. Do not place heavy  
objects on your CD/DVDs.  
6. If your CD/DVDs become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry cloth.  
Wipe from the center out, do not wipe in a circular direction around the CD/  
DVD. If necessary, use a cloth dampened in water or a neutral cleaner. Do not  
use benzine, thinner or similar cleaner.  
Diskettes  
1. Store your diskettes in the container they came in to protect them and keep  
them clean. If a diskette is dirty, do not use cleaning fluid. Clean it with a soft  
damp cloth.  
2. Do not slide back the diskette’s protective metal covering or touch the  
diskette’s magnetic surface. Fingerprints may prevent the diskette drive from  
reading data from the diskette.  
3. Data may be lost if the diskette is twisted; bent; or exposed to direct sunlight,  
extremeheatorcold.  
4. Do not place heavy objects on your diskettes.  
5. Do not eat, smoke, or use erasers near your diskettes. Foreign particles inside  
the diskette’s jacket can damage the magnetic surface.  
6. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your diskettes. Keep your diskettes away  
from speakers, radios, television sets and other sources of magnetic fields.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the microphone  
Using the microphone  
Your computer has a built-in microphone that can be used to record monaural  
sounds into your applications. It can also be used to issue voice commands to  
applications that support such functions.  
Since your computer has a built-in microphone and speaker, “howling” may be  
heard under certain conditions. Howling occurs when sound from the speaker is  
picked up in the microphone and amplified back to the speaker, which amplifies it  
again to the microphone.  
This howling occurs repeatedly and causes a very loud, high-pitched noise. It is a  
common phenomenon that occurs in any sound system when the microphone input  
is output to the speaker (throughput) and the speaker volume is too loud or too  
close to the microphone. You can control throughput by adjusting the volume of  
your speaker or through the Mute function.  
To adjust the volume or activate Mute, click start, point to All Programs, point to  
Accessories, point to Entertainment and click Volume Control. In the  
Master Volumepanel, you can use the slide bars to adjust the volume level or  
click Mute at the bottom of the panel.  
Modem  
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem to and  
from a telephone jack.  
NOTE: The internal modem does not support voice functions. All data  
and fax functions are supported.  
CAUTIONS: 1. In case of a lightning storm, unplug the modem cable  
from the telephone jack.  
2. Do not connect the modem to a digital telephone line.  
A digital line will damage the modem.  
Region selection  
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will need to  
make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region in which it will be  
used.  
To select a region, follow the steps below.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
1. a. In Windows XP, click start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA  
Internal Modem and click Region Select Utility.  
NOTE: Do not use the Country/Region Select function in the Modem  
setup utility in the Control Panel if the function is available. If you  
change the Country/Region in the Control Panel, the change may not  
take effect.  
b. In Windows 2000, click Start, point to Programs, point to TOSHIBA  
Internal Modem and click Region Select Utility.  
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Task Bar.  
3. Click the icon with the primary mouse button to display a list of regions that  
the modem supports. A sub menu for telephony location information will also  
be displayed. A check will appear next to the currently selected region and  
telephony location.  
4. Select a region from the region menu or a telephony location from the sub-  
menu.  
• When you click a region it becomes the modem’s region selection, and the  
New Location for telephony will be set automatically.  
• When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is automati-  
cally selected and it becomes the modem’s current region setting.  
Properties menu  
Click the icon with the secondary mouse button to display properties menu on the  
screen.  
Setting  
You can enable or disable the following settings:  
AutoRunMode  
The Region Select utility starts automatically when you start up the operating  
system.  
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.  
The dialing properties dialog box will be displayed automatically after you  
select the region.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modem  
Location list for region selection.  
A submenu appears displaying location information for telephony.  
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current  
Location region code do not match.  
A warning dialog box is displayed if current settings for region code and  
telephony location are incorrect.  
Modem Selection  
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is displayed.  
Select the COM port for your modem to use.  
Dialing Properties  
Select this item to display the dialing properties.  
CAUTION: If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunica-  
tions Business Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is  
illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other selection.  
Connecting  
To connect the internal modem cable, follow the steps below.  
1. Plug one end of the modular cable into the modem jack.  
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.  
Figure 4-12 Connecting the internal modem  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
CAUTION: Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the  
cable is connected.  
NOTE: If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or HDD  
connected to a 16-bit PC card, you might experience the following  
modem problems:  
1. Modem speed is slow or communication is interrupted.  
2. Skips may occur in sound.  
Disconnecting  
To disconnect the internal modem cable, follow the steps below.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the telephone jack and pull out the  
connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the computer in the same manner.  
Wireless communications  
The computer’s wireless communication function supports both wireless LAN and  
Bluetooth devices.  
Wireless LAN  
The wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence  
SpreadSpectrumradiotechnologythatcomplieswithIEEE802.11wirelessLAN  
standard (Revision A, B),Turbo Mode. It supports the following features:  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit range of 54, 48, 36,  
24, 18, 12, 9 and 6 Mbit/s. (Revision A, Revision A/B combo type)  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit range of 11, 5.5, 2  
and 1 Mbit/s. (Revision B)  
Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the transmit range of 108, 96, 72,  
48, 36, 24, 18 and 12 Mbit/s. (Turbo Mode, Revision A/B combo type)  
FrequencyChannelSelection(5GHz:RevisionA/2.4GHz:RevisionB)  
Roamingovermultiplechannels  
CardPowerManagement  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on 152 bit encryption  
algorithm. (Revision A/B combo type).Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data  
encryption, based on 128 bit encryption algorithm. (Revision B only type).  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless communications  
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data encryption, based on 256bit  
encryption algorithm. (Revision A/B combo type)  
Wake-up on LAN does not function on a wireless LAN.  
Security  
1. Be sure to enable WEP (encryption) function. Otherwise your computer will  
allow the illegal access by outsider through wireless LAN to cause illegal  
intrusion, eavesdropping, and loss or destruction of stored data. TOSHIBA  
strongly recommend the customer to enable the WEP function.  
2. TOSHIBA is not liable for the eavesdropping of data due to the use of  
wireless LAN and the damage thereof.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth™ wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between electronic  
devices such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones.  
You cannot use the built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional Bluetooth PC card  
simultaneously.  
Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:  
Worldwide operation  
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operates in the 2.45 GHz band, which is  
license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries in the world.  
Radio links  
You can easily establish links between two or more devices. The link is maintained  
even if the devices are not within line of sight.  
Security  
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:  
Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible to  
falsify the origin of a message.  
Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Wireless communication switch  
You can enable or disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions, with the on/off  
switch. No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off. Slide the  
switch to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.  
CAUTION: Set the switch to off in airplanes and hospitals. Check the  
indicator. It will stop glowing when the wireless communication function  
isoff.  
Wireless communication Indicator  
The wireless communication indicator indicates the status of the wireless communi-  
cation functions.  
Indicatorstatus Indication  
Indicatoroff  
Wireless communication switch is set to off.  
Automaticpowerdownbecauseofoverheating.  
Powermalfunction  
Indicatorglows  
Wireless communication switch is on.  
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an applica-  
tion.  
If you used the Task Bar to disable W-LAN, restart the computer or follow the  
procedures below to enable the system to recognize W-LAN. Open or click the  
following: start, Control Panel, System, Hardware Device Manager,  
Network adapters, TOSHIBA Wireless LAN Mini PCI Card or Atheros  
AR5001X Mini PCI Wireless Network Adaptor and enable.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second,  
10BASE-T),FastEthernetLAN(100megabitspersecond,100BASE-Tx)andGigabit  
EthernetLAN (1000megabitspersecond,1000BASE-T).  
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.  
CAUTION: Do not install or remove an optional memory module while  
Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
NOTE: The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the  
system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN  
Connecting LAN cable  
CAUTION: The computer must be configured properly before connecting  
to a LAN. Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings  
could cause a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN  
administrator regarding set-up procedures.  
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T), be  
sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or a CAT5E cable. (A CAT5E cable is  
recommended.) You cannnot use a CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX), be  
sure to connect with a CAT5 cable. You cannot use a CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you can  
connect with either a CAT5 or a CAT3.  
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps below.  
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices connected to  
the computer.  
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear the  
latch click into place.  
Figure 4-13 Connecting the LAN cable  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector. Check with your  
LAN administrator before connecting to a hub.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Disconnecting LAN cable  
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps below.  
CAUTION: Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out  
before you disconnect the computer from the LAN.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull out the  
connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub in the same manner. Check with your  
LAN administrator before disconnecting from the hub.  
Cleaning the computer  
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust and use  
care with liquids around the computer.  
Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get wet,  
turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely before you  
turn it on again.  
Clean the computer using a slightly damp (with water) cloth. You can use glass  
cleaner on the display. Spray a small amount of cleaner on a soft, clean cloth  
and wipe the screen gently with the cloth.  
CAUTION: Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid  
run into any part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to  
clean the computer.  
Moving the computer  
The computer is designed for rugged durability. However, a few simple precautions  
taken when moving the computer will help ensure trouble-free operation.  
Make sure all disk activity has ended before moving the computer. Check the  
Disk and Slim Select Bay indicators on the computer.  
If a CD/DVD is in the drives, remove it. Also make sure the drawer is securely  
closed.  
Turn off the power to the computer.  
Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the computer.  
Close the display. Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heat dispersal  
Close all port covers.  
Use the carrying case when transporting the computer.  
Heat dispersal  
To protect from overheating, the CPU has an internal temperature sensor. If the  
computer’s internal temperature rises to a certain level, the cooling fan is turned on  
or the processing speed is lowered. You can select whether to control the CPU  
temperature by turning on the fan first, then if necessary, lowering the CPU speed.  
Or, by lowering the CPU speed first, then if necessary, turning on the fan. Use the  
Cooling Method item of the Power Save Mode window in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Maximum Turns on the fan first, then if necessary, lowers the CPU  
Performance processing speed.  
Performance Uses a combination of the fan and lowering the CPU  
processing speed.  
Battery optimized Lowers the CPU processing speed first, then if necessary  
turns on the fan.  
When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the fan is turned off and the CPU  
operation returns to standard speed.  
NOTE: If the CPU temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the system automatically shuts down to prevent damage.  
Data in memory will be lost.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
The Keyboard  
The computer’s keyboard layouts are compatible with a 101/102-key enhanced  
keyboard. By pressing some keys in combination, all the 101/102-key keyboard  
functions can be executed on the computer.  
The number of keys on your keyboard depends on which country/region’s key-  
board layout your computer is configured with. Keyboards for numerous languages  
are available.  
There are five types of keys: typewriter keys, keypad overlay, function keys, soft  
keys and cursor control keys.  
Typewriter keys  
The typewriter keys, produce the upper- and lower-case letters, numbers, punctua-  
tion marks, and special symbols that appear on the screen.  
There are some differences, however, between using a typewriter and using a  
computer keyboard:  
Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces, which  
are created by a “space character,” may also vary depending on line justifica-  
tion and other factors.  
The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one) are not interchangeable on  
computers as they are on a typewriter.  
The uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero) are not interchangeable.  
The Caps Lock function key locks only the alphabetic characters in upper-  
case while the shift lock on a typewriter places all keys in the shifted position.  
The Shift keys, the Tab key, and the BkSp (backspace) key perform the  
same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special computer  
functions.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
F1 … F12 function keys  
The function keys (not to be confused with Fn) are the 12 keys at the top of your  
keyboard. These keys function differently from other keys.  
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute programmed  
functions when pressed. Used in combination with the Fn key, keys marked with  
icons execute specific functions on the computer. See the section, Soft keys: Fn key  
combinations, in this chapter. The function executed by individual keys depends on  
the software you are using.  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations  
The Fn (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in combination  
with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key combinations that enable,  
disable or configure specific features.  
NOTE: Some software may disable or interfere with soft-key operations.  
Soft-key settings are not restored by the Standby feature.  
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard  
PrtSc  
Scroll  
lock  
Pause  
Break  
Esc  
F1  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
F2  
SysReg  
_
-
~
`
!
@
#
$
%
&
7
(
)
+
=
Num  
Lock  
*
^
PgUp  
PgDn  
*
.
Bk Sp  
Ins  
Home  
End  
/
2
6
8
1
3
4
5
9
0
7
8
9
{
[
}
]
Tab  
Del  
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
\
Home  
PgUp  
6
+
, ,  
,
:
;
4
5
2
Enter  
CapsLock  
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
<
,
3
>
.
?
/
1
Shift  
Z
X
C
B
N
M
Shift  
V
PgDn  
End  
Enter  
.
0
Ctrl  
Alt  
Alt  
Ctrl  
Del  
Ins  
Figure 5-1 A 101-key enhanced keyboard layout  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations  
The keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 101-key enhanced  
keyboard, shown in figure 5-1. The 101/102-key enhanced keyboard has a numeric  
keypad and scroll lock key. It also has additional Enter and Ctrl keys to the right of  
the main keyboard. Since the keyboard of a portable computer is smaller and has  
fewer keys, some of the enhanced keyboard functions must be simulated using two  
keys instead of one on the larger keyboard.  
Your software may require you to use keys that the keyboard does not have.  
Pressing the Fn key and one of the following keys simulates the enhanced  
keyboard’s functions.  
Press Fn + F10 or Fn + F11 to access the integrated keypad. When activated, the  
keys with gray markings on the bottom edge become numeric keypad keys (Fn +  
F11) or cursor control keys (Fn + F10). Refer to the Keypad overlay section in this  
chapter for more information on how to operate these keys. The power on default  
for both settings is off.  
Press Fn + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power on  
default is off.  
Press Fn + Enter to simulate Enter on the enhanced keyboard’s numeric keypad.  
Press Fn + Ctrl to simulate the enhanced keyboard’s right Ctrl key.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Hot keys  
Hot keys (Fn + a function or Esc key) let you enable or disable certain features of  
the computers.  
Sound mute: Pressing Fn + Esc in a Windows environment turns sound on or  
off. When you press these hot keys, the current setting will change and be  
displayed as an icon.  
Instant security: Press Fn + F1 to blank the screen to prevent others from  
accessing your data. To restore the screen and original settings, press any key or  
press the Dual Pointing Device. If a screensaver password is registered, a dialog  
box will appear. Enter the screensaver password and click OK. If no password is  
set, the screen will be restored when you press any key or press the Dual Pointing  
Device.  
Power save mode: Pressing Fn + F2 changes the power save mode.  
If you press Fn + F2 in a Windows environment, the Power Save Mode is  
displayed in a dialog box similar to the one below. Continue holding down Fn and  
press F2 again to change the setting. You can also change this setting through the  
Plugged in or Running on batteries item of the Power Saver Properties window in  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations  
Standby: When you press Fn + F3, the computer enters Standby. To avoid  
entering Standby unexpectedly, a dialog box appears for verification. However, if  
you select the check box, it will not appear in the future.  
Hibernation: When you press Fn + F4, the computer enters Hibernation. To  
avoid entering Hibernation unexpectedly, a dialog box appears for verification.  
However, if you select the check box, it will not appear in the future.  
Display selection: Press Fn + F5 to change the active display device. When you  
press these hot keys, a dialog box appears. Only selectable devices will be dis-  
played. Hold down Fn and press F5 again to change the device. When you release  
Fn and F5, the selected device will change. If you hold down these hot keys for five  
seconds the selection will return to LCD.  
LCD Display Brightness: Pressing Fn + F6 decreases the display brightness in  
decrements. When you press these hot keys, the current setting will be displayed  
for two seconds by an icon. You can also change this setting through the Monitor  
brightness item of the Power Save Mode window in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
LCD Display Brightness: Pressing Fn + F7 increases the display brightness in  
increments. When you press these hot keys, the current setting will be displayed  
for two seconds by a pop-up icon. You can also change this setting through the  
Monitor brightness item of the Power Save Mode window in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
NOTES: 1. The brightness level is always set at the maximum value for  
about 18 seconds, when the LCD turns on. After 18  
seconds, the brightness level will appear at the Power  
Save Mode setting or you can change it manually.  
2. Display clarity increases with the brightness level.  
3. LCD Display Brightness control using Fn + F6/F7 keys  
does not function when the Brightness sensor is turned on  
by TOSHIBA Power Saver. Turn off the Brightness Sensor  
when you want to adjust LCD Display Brightness manually.  
Wireless setting: If your computer has both Bluetooth and wireless LAN  
functions, you can press Fn + F8 to select which type of wireless communication  
you want to use. When you press these hot keys, a dialog box will appear.  
Continue holding down Fn and press F8 to change the setting. If wireless  
communication is turned off, Disabled Wireless Communication  
Switchwill be displayed.  
NOTE: If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box  
will appear.  
Dual Pointing Device: Pressing Fn + F9 in a windows environment enables or  
disables the Dual Pointing Device function. When you press these hot keys, the  
current setting will change and be displayed as an icon.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows special keys  
Display resolution selection: Press Fn + space keys to change the display  
resolution. Each time when you press these hot keys, the display resolution  
changes as follows: From the current resolution (the original resolution) to  
1024X768,from1024X768to800X600,from800X600totheoriginalresolution.  
Fn Sticky key  
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the Fn key sticky, that is,  
you can press it once, release it, and then press an F number” key. To start the  
TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility, clickstart, point to All Programs, point to  
TOSHIBAUtilitiesandclickAccessibility.  
Windows special keys  
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows :  
Windows logo key activates the start menu and the other, the application key, has  
the same function as the secondary mouse button.  
This key activates the Windows start menu.  
This key has the same function as the secondary mouse button.  
Keypad overlay  
Your computer’s keyboard does not have an independent numeric keypad, but its  
numeric keypad overlay functions like one.  
The keys in the center of the keyboard with gray letters make up the numeric  
keypad overlay. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric keypad  
on the 101/102-key enhanced keyboard in figure 5-2.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Turning on the overlays  
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor and page  
control.  
Arrow mode  
To turn on the Arrow mode, press Fn + F10. The Arrow mode F10 indicator lights.  
Now try cursor and page control using the keys shown in figure 5-2. Press Fn +  
F10 again to turn off the overlay.  
Numeric mode  
To turn on the Numeric mode, press Fn + F11. The Numeric mode F11 indicator  
lights. Now try numeric data entry using the keys in figure 5-2. Press Fn + F11  
again to turn off the overlay.  
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay  
on)  
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard without  
turning off the overlay:  
1. Hold Fn and press any other key. All keys will operate as if the overlay were  
off.  
2. Type upper-case characters by holding Fn + Shift and pressing a character  
key.  
3. Release Fn to continue using the overlay.  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
While using the normal keyboard, you can temporarily use the keypad overlay  
without turning it on:  
1. Press and hold down Fn.  
2. Check the keyboard indicators. Pressing Fn turns on the most recently used  
overlay. If the Numeric mode indicator lights, you can use the overlay for  
numeric entry. If the Arrow mode indicator lights, you can use the overlay for  
cursor and page control.  
3. Release Fn to return to normal keyboard operation.  
Temporarily changing modes  
If the computer is in Numeric mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow  
mode by pressing a shift key.  
If the computer is in Arrow mode, you can switch temporarily to Numeric  
mode by pressing a shift key.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard operation. But,  
you can generate these characters using their ASCII codes.  
With the overlay on:  
1. Hold down Alt.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.  
3. Release Alt, and the ASCII character appears on the display screen.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
With the overlay off:  
1. Hold down Alt + Fn.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.  
3. Release Alt + Fn, and the ASCII character appears on the display screen.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
The computer’s power resources include the AC adaptor and internal batteries. This  
chapter gives details on making the most effective use of these resources including  
charging and changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and power up  
modes.  
Power conditions  
The computer’s operating capability and battery charge status are affected by the  
power conditions: whether an AC adaptor is connected, whether a battery is  
installed and what the charge level is for the battery.  
Table 6-1 Power conditions  
Power on  
Power off (no operation)  
AC  
Mainbattery  
fully  
• Operates  
• Nocharge  
adaptor  
• Nocharge  
LED: Battery green  
DCIN green  
connected charged  
LED: Battery green  
DCIN green  
Mainbattery  
• Operates  
• Charge*1  
• Quickcharge*1  
LED: Battery orange  
DCIN green  
partially  
charged  
LED: Battery orange  
DCIN green  
or no charge  
No  
• Operates  
• Nocharge  
mainbattery  
installed  
• Nocharge  
LED: Battery off  
DCIN green  
LED: Battery off  
DCIN green  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off (no operation)  
AC  
2ndbattery  
fully  
• Operates  
•Nocharge  
adaptor  
• Nocharge  
•LED: 2nd battery green  
DCINgreen  
connected charged  
LED: 2nd battery green  
DCINgreen  
2ndbattery  
• Operates  
• Quickcharge*2  
partially  
• Charge*2  
LED: 2nd battery orange  
DCINgreen  
charged  
LED: 2nd battery orange  
DCINgreen  
or no charge  
No  
• Operates  
• Nocharge  
2ndbattery  
installed  
• Nocharge  
LED: 2nd battery off  
DCINgreen  
LED: 2nd battery off  
DCINgreen  
AC  
Mainbattery  
charge is  
• Operates  
adaptor  
not  
LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
above low  
connected battery  
triggerpoint  
Mainbattery  
charge is  
below low  
battery  
• Operates  
LED: Battery  
flashesorange  
DC IN off  
triggerpoint  
Mainbattery  
charge is  
Computer shuts down*3  
exhausted  
No  
• Nooperation*4  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
mainbattery  
installed  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power conditions  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off (no operation)  
AC  
2ndbattery  
charge  
• Operates  
adaptor  
not  
LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN off  
isabove  
connected low battery  
triggerpoint  
2ndbattery  
charge  
• Operates  
• LED: 2nd battery  
flashorange  
DC IN off  
is below  
low battery  
triggerpoint  
2ndbattery  
charge is  
Computer shut down*3  
exhausted  
No  
• Nooperation*5  
• LED: 2nd battery off  
DC IN off  
2ndbattery  
isinstalled  
NOTE: 2nd battery indicator refers to the Slim Select Bay indica-  
tor when a secondary battery is installed.  
*1 When the secondary battery is not charging.  
*2 When the main battery is not charging  
*3 For the computer to shut down in hibernation mode, the hibernation feature  
must be enabled in two places in TOSHIBA Power Saver: the Hibernate  
window and the Battery Alarm item of the Alarm window. If a main battery  
and a secondry battery are installed, the computer does not shut down until  
the charge in both batteries is exhausted.  
*4 When no secondary battery is installed  
*5 When no main battery is installed  
NOTE: When batteries are charged, the main battery is charged first.  
When it is fully charged, the secondary battery is charged.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Power indicators  
As shown in the above table, the Battery, Slim Select Bay, DC IN 15V and  
Power indicators on the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating  
capability and battery charge status.  
Battery indicators  
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the main battery and the  
Slim Select Bay indicator to determine the status of the secondary battery. The  
following indicator lights indicate the battery status:  
Flashing orange The battery charge is low. The AC adaptor must be  
connected to recharge the battery.  
Orange Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and charging the  
battery.  
Green Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is  
fullycharged.  
No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.  
NOTE: If the battery becomes too hot while it is being charged, the  
charge will stop and the battery indicator will go out. When the battery’s  
temperature falls to a normal range, charge will resume. This occurs  
whether the computer’s power is on or off.  
DC IN 15V indicator  
Check the DC IN 15V indicator to determine the power status with the AC adaptor  
connected:  
Green Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and supplying  
proper power to the computer.  
Flashing orange Indicates a problem with the power supply. Plug the AC  
adaptor into another outlet. If it still does not operate  
properly, contact your dealer.  
No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.  
Power indicator  
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status:  
Green Indicates power is being supplied to the computer and the  
computer is turned on.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery types  
Blinkingorange Indicates power is being supplied to the computer while  
the computer is in Standby mode. The indicator turns on  
for one second and off for two seconds.  
No light Under any other conditions, the indicator does not light.  
Battery types  
The computer has three types of batteries:  
Battery packs – main and secondary (option)  
RealTimeClock(RTC)battery  
Main battery  
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer’s main power source is a  
removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as the main  
battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended use of the com-  
puter away from an AC power source.  
Before you remove the battery pack, set the computer to Hibernation mode or save  
your data and shut down the computer. Do not change the battery pack while the  
AC adaptor is connected.  
CAUTIONS: 1. The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can  
explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or  
disposed of. Dispose of the battery as required by local  
ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries recom-  
mended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
2. Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is  
in Standby mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the  
computer loses power it will be lost. When the com-  
puter is powered off in Standby mode, and the AC  
adaptor is not connected, the main battery pack and  
optional secondary battery pack supply power to  
maintain data and program in memory. If the battery  
pack(s) is completely discharged, Standby mode does  
not function and the computer loses all data in  
memory.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
To ensure that the battery pack maintains its maximum capacity, operate the  
computer on battery power at least once a month until the battery pack is fully  
discharged. Refer to Extending battery life in this chapter for procedures. If the  
computer is continuously operated on AC power through an AC adaptor for an  
extended period, more than a month, the battery may fail to retain a charge. It may  
not function efficiently over the expected life of the battery and the Battery  
indicator may not indicate a low-battery condition.  
Secondary battery (option)  
An optional secondary battery can be installed in the Slim Select Bay to increase  
your battery operating time. Note the caution on Standby mode in the previous  
section Main battery.  
CAUTION: The secondary battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which  
can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of.  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
Real Time Clock battery  
TheRealTimeClock(RTC)batteryprovidespowerfortheinternalrealtimeclock  
and calendar. It also maintains the system configuration.  
If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged, the system loses this data and  
the real time clock and calendar stop working. The following message appears when  
you turn on the power:  
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent ****  
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.  
CAUTION: The computer’s RTC battery is a lithium ion battery and  
should be replaced only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service  
representative. The battery can explode if not properly replaced, used,  
handled or disposed of. Dispose of the battery as required by local  
ordinances or regulations.  
NOTE: You can change the setting of RTC by pressing F1 key. Refer to  
chapter 9 for the detail.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
Care and use of the battery pack  
The battery pack is a vital component of portable computing. Taking proper care of  
it will help ensure longer operating time on battery power as well as a longer life for  
your battery pack. Follow the instructions in this section carefully to ensure safe  
operationandmaximumperformance.  
Safety precautions  
Mishandling of batteries can cause death, serious injury or property damage.  
Carefully observe the following advisories:  
Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which could result in death  
or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death  
or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may  
result in moderate or minor injury or property damage.  
Note:Providesimportantinformation.  
Danger  
1. Never try to dispose of the battery pack by burning or expose it to a heating  
device such as a microwave oven. The battery pack could explode and cause  
bodilyinjury.  
2. Never try to disassemble, repair or otherwise tamper with a battery pack. The  
battery pack will overheat and ignite. Leakage of caustic alkaline solution or  
other electrolytic substances will cause fire or injury, possibly resulting in  
death or serious injury.  
3. Never short-circuit the battery pack by contacting the terminals with a metal  
object. A short-circuit can cause fire or otherwise damage the battery pack and  
possibly cause injury. To avoid accidental short-circuit, always wrap the  
battery pack in plastic and cover the terminals with electrical tape when storing  
or disposing of the battery pack.  
4. Never puncture the battery pack with a nail or other sharp object. Never strike  
it with a hammer or other object. Never step on it.  
5. Never try to charge the battery pack in any manner other than that described  
in the user’s manual. Never connect the battery pack to a plug socket or to a  
automobile’s cigarette lighter socket. It may rupture or ignite.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
6. Use only the battery pack supplied with the computer or other device or an  
battery pack approved by the computer or device’s manufacturer. Battery  
packs have different voltages and terminal polarities. Use of an improper  
battery could cause smoke, fire or rupture of the battery pack.  
7. Never subject a battery pack to heat, such as storage near a heat source.  
Exposure to heat can cause the battery pack to ignite, explode or leak caustic  
liquid and cause death or serious injury. It could also fail or malfunction  
causing data loss.  
8. Never expose the battery pack to abnormal shock, vibration or pressure. The  
battery pack’s internal protective device will fail, causing it to overheat,  
explode, ignite or leak caustic liquids possibly resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
9. Never let a battery pack become wet. A wet battery pack will overheat, ignite  
or rupture possibly resulting in death or serious injury.  
Warning  
1. Never allow caustic electrolyte fluid leaked from a battery pack to contact your  
eyes, skin or clothing. If caustic electrolyte fluid should contact your eyes,  
immediately wash your eyes with large amounts of running water and seek  
medical attention, to help prevent eye damage. If electrolyte fluid should  
contact your skin immediately wash it under running water to prevent rash. If  
it contacts your clothes, promptly remove them to prevent the fluid from  
contacting your skin or eyes.  
2. Immediately turn off the power, disconnect the AC adaptor and remove the  
battery if any of the following events are observed in the battery pack:  
offensive or unusual odor, excessive heat, discoloration or deformation. Never  
use the computer again until it has been checked by a TOSHIBA service  
provider. It might generate smoke or fire, or the battery pack might rupture.  
3. Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before attempting  
to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could generate smoke or fire,  
or cause the battery pack to rupture.  
4. Keep the battery pack out or reach of infants and children. It can cause injury.  
Caution  
1. Never continue to use a battery pack after its recharging capacity has become  
impaired, or after the display of a warning message indicating that the battery  
pack’s power is exhausted. Continued use of an exhausted or impaired battery  
pack could cause the loss of data.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
2. Never dispose of battery packs with normal trash. Bring them to your  
TOSHIBA dealer or to another recycling center to save resources and prevent  
environmental damage. Cover the terminals with electrical tape to prevent  
short-circuits, which could cause the battery pack to ignite or rupture.  
3. Use only battery packs recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
4. Always make sure the battery pack is installed correctly and securely.  
Otherwise, a battery pack could fall out and possibly cause injury.  
5. Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and 35  
degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak, battery pack  
performance might deteriorate and the battery life might be shortened.  
6. Be sure to monitor the remaining battery power. If the battery pack and real  
time clock battery discharge completely, Standby and Suspend will not  
function and data in memory will be lost. Also, the computer might register an  
incorrect time and date. In this case, connect the AC adaptor to recharge the  
batteries.  
7. Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the power  
and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery pack while the  
computer is in Suspend or Standby mode. Data will be lost.  
Note  
1. Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is  
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable the  
Wake-up on LAN function.  
2. To ensure the battery pack maintains maximum capacity, operate the computer  
on battery power once a week until the battery pack is fully discharged. Refer  
to the section Extending battery life in this chapter for procedures. If the  
computer is continuously operated on AC power for an extended period, more  
than a week, the battery might fail to retain a charge. It might not function  
efficiently over the expected life of the battery pack and the Battery indicator  
might not indicate a low-battery condition.  
3. After the battery pack is charged, avoid leaving the AC adaptor connected  
and the computer turned off for more than a few hours at a time. Continuing to  
charge a fully-charged battery pack can damage the battery.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Charging the batteries  
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator flashes  
orange indicating that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If you continue  
to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the computer enables  
Hibernation mode (so you don’t lose data) and automatically turns off.  
NOTE: The computer enters Hibernation mode only if Hibernation is  
enabled in two places in TOSHIBA Power Saver: the Hibernate window  
and the Battery Alarm item of the Alarm window.  
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.  
Procedures  
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the AC  
adaptor to the DC IN socket and plug the other end into a working outlet.  
The Battery indicator glows orange when the battery is being charged.  
CAUTION: Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or  
the optional TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never  
attempt to charge the battery pack with any other charger.  
Time  
The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a dis-  
charged battery.  
Charging time (hours)  
Battery type  
Power on  
Power off  
about 3  
Mainbatterypack(6600mAH)  
Mainbatterypack(4400mAH)  
Secondary battery pack  
RTC battery  
16  
11  
9
about 2.5  
about 2.5  
8
Doesn't charge  
NOTE: The charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient  
temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you use the  
computer. If you make heavy use of external devices, for example, the  
battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Refer also to the  
section Maximizingbatteryoperatingtime.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
Battery charging notice  
The battery may not charge right away under the following conditions:  
The battery is extremely hot or cold. If the battery is extremely hot, it might not  
charge at all. To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity, charge the  
batteryatroomtemperatureof10°to3C(50°to86°F).  
The battery is nearly completely discharged. Leave the AC adaptor connected  
for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging.  
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time when  
you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:  
The battery has not been used for a long time.  
The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for a long  
time.  
A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.  
In such case, follow the steps below.  
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power on  
until the power automatically shuts off.  
2. Plug in the AC adaptor.  
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.  
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal capacity.  
NOTE: Leaving the AC adaptor connected will shorten battery life. At  
least once a month, run the computer on battery power until the battery  
is fully discharged, then recharge the battery.  
Monitoring battery capacity  
Remaining battery power can be monitored in the Power Save Modes window in  
PowerSaver.  
NOTES: 1. Wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before  
trying to monitor the remaining operating time. The com-  
puter needs this time to check the battery’s remaining  
capacity and to calculate the remaining operating time,  
based on the current power consumption rate and remaining  
battery capacity. The actual remaining operating time may  
differ slightly from the calculated time.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
2. With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery’s  
capacity will gradually decrease. Therefore, an often  
used, older battery will not operate for as long as a new  
battery even when both are fully charged. In this case,  
Power Save Modes window in TOSHIBA Power Saver  
will indicate a 100% charge for both the old and new  
battery, but the displayed estimated time remaining will  
be shorter for the older battery.  
Maximizing battery operating time  
A battery’s usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a single  
charge.  
How long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:  
How you configure the computer (for example, whether you enable battery-  
power saving options). The computer provides a battery save mode, which can  
be set in TOSHIBA Power Saver, to conserve battery power. This mode has  
the following options:  
• Processor speed  
• Monitor brightness  
• System standby  
• System hibernation  
• Turning off of monitor  
• Turning off of hard disks  
How often and how long you use the hard disk, optical disc and the diskette  
drive.  
How much charge the battery contained to begin with.  
How you use optional devices, such as a PC card, to which the battery  
supplies power.  
Enabling Standby mode conserves battery power if you are frequently turning  
the computer off and on.  
Where you store your programs and data.  
Closing the display when you are not using the keyboard saves power.  
Operating time decreases at low temperatures.  
The condition of the battery terminals. Make sure the battery terminals stay  
clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before installing the battery pack.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
Retaining data with power off  
When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries retain  
dataforthefollowingapproximatetimeperiods:  
Batterypack(6600mAH) about 7 days (Standby mode)  
about 43 days (Boot mode)  
Batterypack(4400mAH) about 4 days (Standby mode)  
about 29 days (Boot mode)  
RTC battery 40 days  
Extending battery life  
Tomaximizethelifeofyourbatterypack:  
At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source and  
operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges. Before doing  
so, follow the steps below.  
1. Turn off the computer’s power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer’s power. If it does not  
turn on go to step 4.  
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If the battery pack  
has at least five minutes of operating time, continue operating until the  
battery pack is fully discharged. If the Battery indicator flashes or there is  
some other warning to indicate a low battery, go to step 4.  
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer and the power cord to a power  
outlet. The DC IN indicator should glow green, and the Battery indicator  
should glow orange to indicate that the battery pack is being charged. If the  
DC IN indicator does not glow, power is not being supplied. Check the  
connections for the AC adaptor and power cord.  
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.  
If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.  
If you will not be using the system for an extended period, more than one  
month, remove the battery pack.  
Disconnect the AC adaptor when the battery is fully charged. Overcharging  
makes the battery hot and shortens life.  
If you are not going to use the computer for more than eight hours, disconnect  
the AC adaptor.  
Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Replacing the battery pack  
When the battery pack reaches the end of its operating life you will need to install a  
new one. The life of the battery pack is generally about 500 recharges. If the  
Battery indicator or Slim Select Bay indicator (if a Slim Select Bay 2nd battery  
pack is installed) flashes orange shortly after fully recharging the battery, the  
battery pack needs to be replaced.  
You might also replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you  
are operating your computer away from an AC power source. This section explains  
how to remove and install the battery pack. For the details about removing/  
installing the Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack, refer to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Removing the battery pack  
To replace a discharged battery, follow the steps below.  
CAUTIONS: 1. When handling battery packs, do not short circuit the  
terminals. Also do not drop, hit or otherwise apply  
impact; do not scratch or break the casing and do not  
twist or bend the battery pack.  
2. Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is  
in Standby mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the  
computer loses power it will be lost.  
3. In Hibernation mode, data will be lost if you remove  
the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor before the  
save is completed. Wait for the Disk indicator to go  
out.  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables connected to the computer.  
4. Turn the computer upside down.  
5. Slide the battery release latch to free the battery pack for removal, then slide  
out the battery pack.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the battery pack  
BATTERY  
BATTERY PACK  
RELEASE LATCH  
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack  
CAUTION: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent  
battery pack. Please return spent battery packs to your TOSHIBA dealer.  
Installing the battery pack  
To install a battery, follow the steps below.  
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode  
if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of. Dispose of the  
battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only  
batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
1. Turn the computer’s power off.  
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the computer.  
3. Insert the battery pack.  
4. Secure the battery release latch.  
BATTERY  
BATTERY PACK  
RELEASE LATCH  
Figure 6-2 Securing the battery cover  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security: User and  
Supervisor.  
NOTE: Passwords set in TOSHIBA Password Utility are different from  
the Windows password.  
User password  
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:  
Windows2000 Start -> Programs -> TOSHIBA Utilities ->  
TOSHIBAPasswordUtility  
Windows XP  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA Utilities ->  
TOSHIBAPasswordUtility  
The user password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password and  
User Token.  
User Password field  
Set (button)  
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a  
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the computer.  
NOTE: After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking  
whether you want to save it to a diskette or other media. If you forget the  
password, you can open the password file on another computer. Be sure  
to keep the media in a safe place.  
Delete (button)  
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete a  
password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert a proper  
token.  
Change (button)  
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can change a  
password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert a proper  
token.  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
Owner String (text box)  
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you enter text,  
click Apply or OK. The text will be displayed when you are prompted to enter a  
password.  
User Token field  
Create (button)  
You can use an SD card token, instead of entering the password. After you  
have registered a password, insert an SD card and click Create. You can use  
an SD card of any capacity, but it must be formatted correctly.  
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted, you will  
be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD Memory Card  
Format.To start the format tool, point to or click the following items:  
Windows2000 Start -> Programs -> TOSHIBA SD Card Utilities  
-> TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format  
Windows XP  
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA SD Card  
Utilities -> TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format  
CAUTION: When you format an SD Memory card, all data will be  
deleted. Be sure to save data on the card to other media before you  
format the card.  
Disable (button)  
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot revalidate old tokens, but  
you can use the same SD cards to create new tokens.  
Supervisor password  
If you set a supervisor password, some functions might be restricted when a user  
logs on with the user password. To set a supervisor password, execute the file  
TOSUP.EXE.Thefileislocatedat:  
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\Windows  
Utilities\SVPWTool\TOSUP.EXE  
This utility lets you do the following:  
Register, delete or change the supervisor password.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Create or invalidate a supervisor password token  
NOTE: This function in the Supervisor password utility lets you  
invalidate only supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and  
supervisor tokens.  
Specify restrictions for general users.  
Starting the computer by password  
If you registered a password, there are two ways to start the computer:  
Insert a password token before you turn on the computer. The computer will  
start normally, without displaying a password prompt.  
Enter the password manually.  
NOTE: The password is necessary only if the computer was shut down in  
boot mode. It is not needed in Hibernation or Standby mode.  
To enter a password manually, follow these steps:  
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 3, Getting Started. The following  
messagewillappearintheLCD:  
Password=  
2. Enter the Password.  
3. Press Enter.  
NOTE: If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the  
computer shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to  
retry password entry.  
Power-up modes  
The computer has the following power-up modes:  
Boot: Computer shuts down without saving data. Always save your work  
before you turn the computer off in boot mode.  
Hibernation: Data in memory is saved to the hard disk.  
Standby: Data is maintained in the computer’s main memory.  
NOTE: Refer also to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off  
the power in Chapter 3, Getting Started.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Panel power off  
Windows utilities  
You can specify the setting in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Hot keys  
You can use hot keys Fn + F3 to enter Standby mode and Fn + F4 to enter  
Hibernation. See Chapter 5, Keyboard for details.  
Panel power off  
You can set up your computer so that power turns off automatically when you close  
the display panel. When you open the panel, power turns on in Standby or  
Hibernation mode but not in boot mode.  
NOTE: If the panel power off function is enabled and you use Shut down  
Windows, do not close the display until the shut down function is  
completed.  
System Auto Off  
This feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set duration.  
The system shuts down in Standby mode or Hibernation mode in Windows.  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
HW Setup  
This chapter explains how to use TOSHIBA HW Setup program to configure your  
computer.  
HW Setup  
TOSHIBA HW Setup lets you configure settings for General, CPU, Boot Priority,  
Keyboard,LAN,DeviceConfig,Parallel/PrinterandDisplay.  
NOTE: If the supervisor password is set, access to the TOSHIBA HW Setup  
program can be prevented when the user password is used to log on to the  
computer.  
Accessing HW Setup  
If you are using Windows XP, click start, click Control Panel, click Printers and  
Other Hardware and select TOSHIBA HW Setup to run HW Setup.  
If you are using Windows 2000, click Start, point to Settings, click Control  
Panel and select TOSHIBA HW Setup to run HW Setup.  
HW Setup window  
The HW Setup window contains the following tabs: General, CPU, Boot Priority,  
Keyboard,LAN,DeviceConfig,Parallel/Printer,Display.  
There are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply.  
OK Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup window.  
Cancel Closes the window without accepting your changes.  
Apply Accepts all your changes without closing the HW Setup  
window.  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
General  
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons: Default and  
About.  
Setup  
This field displays BIOS Versionand date.  
Default  
Click Default to return all HW Setup values to the factory settings.  
About  
Click About to display the HW Setup version.  
CPU  
This function lets you set the CPU operating mode.  
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode  
This option lets you choose from the following settings:  
Dynamically Switchable CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is enabled.  
When the computer is in use, CPU operation  
is automatically switched when necessary.  
(Default)  
Always High CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is disabled. The  
CPU always runs at its fastest speed.  
Always Low CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is disabled. The  
CPU always runs at low power consumption  
and low speed.  
Boot Priority  
Boot Priority Options  
This option sets the priority for booting the computer. Select from the following  
settings:  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                          
                          
                            
                            
                                        
                                        
                                          
                                          
                                                            
                                                            
                                                              
                                                              
HW Setup  
HDD  
−>  
FDD  
−>  
CD-ROM  
−>  
LAN The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:HDD, diskettedrive,  
CD-ROM*andLAN.(Default)  
FDD > HDD > CD-ROM > LAN The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:diskettedrive, HDD,  
CD-ROM*and LAN.  
HDD > CD-ROM > LAN > FDD The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:HDD,CD-ROM*,LAN  
and diskette drive.  
FDD > CD-ROM > LAN > HDD The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:diskettedrive, CD-  
ROM*,LANandHDD.  
CD-ROM > LAN > HDD > FDD The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:CD-ROM*, LAN,  
HDD,diskettedrive.  
CD-ROM > LAN > FDD > HDD The computer looks for bootable files in  
thefollowingorder:CD-ROM*,LAN,  
diskette drive and HDD.  
*
In this computer, CD-ROM refers to the Slim Select Bay optical media drive.  
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.  
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.  
2. Thefollowingmenuwillbedisplayedwiththefollowingicons:Built-inHDD,  
SlimSelectBayHDD,CD-ROM,FDD,Network(LAN),PCA(ATA)cardboot.  
NOTE: A bar will appear only under the selected device.  
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and press  
Enter.  
NOTES: 1. If a supervisor password is set, the menu above does not  
appear when you use the user password to start the  
computer.  
2. The selection method above does not change the boot  
priority settings in HW Setup.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
3. If you press a key other than one of those above or if the  
selected device is not installed, the system will boot according  
to the current setting in HW Setup.  
4. Support of PCA (ATA) card boot is guaranteed only for  
TOSHIBAPCcardHDDs.  
5. A PCA (ATA) card takes the position of HDD in the Boot  
Priority Options list.  
HDD Priority Options  
If more than one HDD is installed in the computer, this option lets you set the  
priority for HDD detection. If the first detected HDD has a boot command, the  
systemwillbootfromtheHDD.  
Built-in HDD > 2nd HDD > PC Card Thecomputerwilllookforthe  
(Default) Built-inHDDfirst,nextthe2ndHDD  
and then the PC Card (Default).  
2nd HDD > Built-in HDD > PC Card Thecomputerwilllookforthe2nd  
HDDfirst,nexttheBuilt-inHDDand  
then the PC Card.  
Built-in HDD > PC Card > 2nd HDD ThecomputerwilllookfortheBuilt-  
inHDDfirst, nextPCCardandthen  
the2ndHDD.  
2nd HDD > PC Card > Built-in HDD The computer will look for the 2nd  
HDD first, next the PC Card and  
thentheBuilt-inHDD.  
PC Card > Built-in HDD > 2nd HDD The computer will look for the PC  
Cardfirst,nexttheBuilt-inHDD  
and then the 2nd HDD.  
PC Card > 2nd HDD > Built-in HDD The computer will look for the PC  
Card first, next the 2nd HDD and  
thentheBuilt-inHDD.  
NOTE: If a boot command is not found on the first detected HDD, the  
system will not boot from the other HDD. It will search the next device in  
the boot priority for a boot command.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Keyboard  
External Keyboard Fn key  
Use this option to set a key combination on an external keyboard to emulate the Fn  
key on the computer’s internal keyboard. Setting an Fn key equivalent will let you  
use Hot keys by pressing the set combination instead of the Fn key. (PS/2  
keyboard only)  
Disabled No Fn key equivalent (Default)  
Fn Equivalent Left Ctrl  
Right Ctrl  
+ Left Alt  
+ Right Alt  
+ Left Shift  
+ Right Shift  
Left Alt  
Right Alt  
Left Alt  
+ Caps Lock  
NOTE: If you select Left Ctrl + Left Alt or Right Ctrl + Right Alt for  
this option, you cannot use the selected keys to reboot the computer in  
combination with the Del key. For example, if you select Left Ctrl +  
Left Alt, you must use Right Ctrl, Right Alt and Del to reboot the  
computer. Left Ctrl, Left Alt and Del cannot be used.  
Wake-up on Keyboard  
When this feature is enabled and the computer is in Standby mode, you can turn on  
the computer by pressing any key. It is effective only for the internal keyboard and  
only when the computer is in standby mode.  
Enabled Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard.  
Disabled Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard. (Default)  
LAN  
Wake-up on LAN  
This features lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a wake-up  
signalfromtheLAN.  
Enabled Enables Wake-up on LAN.  
Disabled Disables Wake-up on LAN. (Default)  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
CAUTION: Do not install or remove an optional memory module while  
Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
NOTE: The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the  
system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
Built-in LAN  
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.  
Enabled EnablesBuilt-inLANfunctions.(Default)  
Disabled Disables Built-in LAN functions.  
Device Config  
Device Configuration  
This option lets you set the device configuration.  
Setup by OS Operating system sets devices that it can control. (Default)  
All Devices BIOS sets all devices.  
Parallel/Printer  
This tab lets you set the Printer Port Type. Use the Windows Device Manager to  
make settings for the Parallel port.  
Parallel Port Mode  
The options in this tab are ECP and Standard Bi-directional.  
ECP Sets the port type to Extended Capabilities Port (ECP). For  
most printers, the port should be set to ECP. (Default)  
Standard This setting should be used with some other parallel  
Bi-directional devices.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Display  
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the internal  
LCDscreenorforanexternalmonitor.  
Power On Display  
Lets you set the display to be used when the computer is booted.  
Auto-Selected Selects an external monitor if one is connected. Other-  
wise, it selects the internal LCD. (Default)  
LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal LCD and external monitor for  
simultaneous display.  
USB  
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. If your  
operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse and  
keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulationitem to  
Enabled.  
Enabled Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. (Default)  
Disabled Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation.  
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.  
Enabled Enables the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation. (Default)  
Disabled Disables the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.  
However, the USB port 3 does not support USB KB/Mouse and USB-FDD Legacy  
Emulation.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Optional Devices  
Optional devices can expand the computer’s capabilities and its versatility. This  
chapter describes connection or installation of the following devices, which are  
availablefromyourTOSHIBAdealer:  
Cards/memory  
PC cards  
SD cards  
Memoryexpansion  
Power devices  
Additional battery pack  
Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack  
Additional AC adaptor  
Battery charger  
Peripheral devices  
SlimSelectBayHDDadaptor  
Externalmonitor  
TV  
i.LINK(IEEE1394)  
Other  
Securitylock  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
PC cards  
The computer is equipped with a PC card expansion slot that can accommodate one  
5 mm Type II card. Any PC card that meets industry standards (manufactured by  
TOSHIBA or other vendor) can be installed. The slot supports 16-bit PC cards,  
including PC card 16’s multifunction card and CardBus PC cards.  
CardBus supports the new standard of 32-bit PC cards. The bus provides superior  
performance for the greater demands of multimedia data transmission.  
Inserting a PC card  
The PC card connector is located on the right side of the computer.  
Windows’ hot-install feature lets you insert PC cards while the computer’s power is  
on.  
NOTE: Do not insert a PC card while the computer is in standby or  
hibernation mode. Some cards might not work properly.  
To Insert a PC card, follow the steps below.  
1. Slide the PC card lock into the unlocked position.  
2. Insert the PC card.  
3. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
4. Slide the PC card lock into the locked position.  
PC CARD  
Figure 8-1 Inserting the PC card  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC cards  
After inserting the card, refer to the card’s documentation and check the configura-  
tion in Windows to make sure it is appropriate for your card.  
Removing a PC card  
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below.  
1. Slide the PC card lock into the unlocked position.  
2. a. In Windows XP, open the Safety Remove Hardware icon on the  
system tray and disable the PC card.  
b. In Windows 2000, open the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the  
system tray and disable the PC card.  
3. Press the PC card eject button to extend it.  
4. Press the extended eject button to pop the card out slightly.  
5. Pinch the PC card and remove it.  
PC CARD  
EJECT BUTTON  
Figure 8-2 Removing the PC card  
Using the PC card lock  
You can secure the PC card lock with a screw to inhibit unauthorized removal of PC  
cards from the computer.  
NOTE: Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Locking the PC card slot  
To lock the PC card slot, follow the steps below.  
1. When the computer is shipped, a screw secures the PC card lock in the  
unlocked position. Remove the screw.  
2. Slide the PC card lock to the locked position. A metal tongue will cover the PC  
card slot.  
3. Secure the screw.  
SCREW  
PC CARD LOCK  
Figure 8-3 Securing the PC card lock in the lock position  
Unlocking the PC card slot  
To unlock the PC card slot, follow the steps below.  
1. Remove the screw securing the PC card lock.  
2. Slide the PC card lock to the unlocked position. The metal tongue covering the  
PC card slot will be retracted.  
3. Secure the PC card lock with the screw.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SD cards  
SCREW  
PC CARD LOCK  
Figure 8-4 Securing the PC card lock in the unlock position  
SD cards  
The computer is equipped with an SD card slot that can accommodate Secure  
Digital flash memory cards with various memory capacities. SD cards let you easily  
transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants,  
that use SD card flash-memory. The cards have a high level of security and copy  
protection features. The slot cannot accommodate Multi Media cards.  
CAUTION: Keep foreign objects out of the SD card slot. A pin or similar  
object can damage the computer’s circuitry.  
NOTE: SD memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music  
Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or  
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback  
protected material on another computer or other device. You may not use  
the reproduction of any copyrighted material except for your personal  
enjoyment.  
Formatting an SD card  
SD memory cards are sold with format in conformity to the Standards of SD memory  
card. If you format the SD card again, be sure to format it with the utility of  
TOSHIBA SD memory card format, not in the format defined as the Windows  
standard format.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
In order to run TOSHIBA SD memory card format, select [Start] - [All Programs] -  
[TOSHIBASDcardutilities]-[TOSHIBASDmemorycardformat],orrightclickthe  
mouse on the icon of SD drive in Explore and select [TOSHIBA SD memory card  
format].  
TOSHIBA SD memory card format does not format the protected area of SD memory  
card. When you format all area of the SD memory card including the protected area,  
use the application that responds to the copy protection system.  
Inserting an SD card  
To insert an SD card, follow the steps below.  
1. Insert the SD card.  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
SD CARD  
Figure 8-5 Inserting an SD card  
CAUTION: Make sure the SD card is oriented properly before you insert it.  
Removing an SD card  
To remove an SD card, follow the steps below.  
1. Click the Safety Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to SD card and click.  
3. Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SD cards  
4. Pinch the card and remove it.  
SD CARD  
INDICATOR  
SD CARD  
Figure 8-6 Removing an SD card  
CAUTION: Make sure the SD card indicator is out before you remove  
the card or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the card or turn  
off the power while the computer is accessing the card you may lose data  
or damage the card. Please do not remove the SD card from the SD card  
slot while in Standby or in Hibernation state. If you do, PC may become  
unstable or the data in SD card may be lost.  
SD card care  
CAUTION: Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not  
want to record data.  
1. Do not write to an SD card if the battery power is low. Low power could affect  
writingaccuracy.  
2. Do not remove an SD card while read/write is in progress.  
3. The SD card is designed so that it can be Inserted only one way. Do not try to  
force the card into the slot.  
4. Do not leave an SD card partially inserted in the slot. Press the SD card until  
you hear it click into place.  
5. Do not twist or bend SD cards.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
6. Do not expose SD cards to liquids or store in humid areas or in lay media close  
to containers of liquid.  
7. After using an SD card, return it to its case.  
8. Do not touch the metal part or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty.  
Memory expansion  
This computer is equipped with two memory module sockets beneath the keyboard.  
You can increase the amount of RAM by installing an additional memory or  
replacing default memories with additional memories. This section describes how to  
installandremoveamemorymodule.  
NOTE: Place a mat beneath the computer to prevent making a scratch  
on the lid when replacing the memory module. Avoid the mat that  
generates static electricity.  
CAUTION: Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.  
CAUTION: Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the  
following conditions. You can damage the computer and the module.  
Also, data will be lost.  
1. The computer is turned on.  
2. The computer was shut down using the Stand by mode or Hiberna-  
tion mode.  
3. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
NOTE: Use a 1-bit, Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten screws. Use  
of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.  
Installing memory module  
Follow the steps below to install a memory module.  
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer’s power off. Make sure  
the Power indicator is off.  
2. Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack. Refer to  
Removing the Battery Pack in chapter 6; Power and Power-up Modes for the  
detail.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory expansion  
4. Turn the computer to the normal position and open the display panel. Tilt the  
display panel slightly beyond the upright position before removing the  
keyboard display.  
5. Put your fingers on the both ends of the keyboard brace and remove it  
carefully to the direction indicated with arrows.  
KEYBORD BRACE  
Figure 8-7 Removing the keyboard brace  
6. Remove three screws (right and left at the both right and left ends and in the  
upper middle of the keyboard) fixing the keyboard.  
Figure 8-8 Removing the keyboard (1)  
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the screw inside the computer when  
removing.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
7. Press the keyboard to the other side. Turn the keyboard upside down when a  
flat cable appears.  
CAUTION: Do not pull the keyboard when turning over. Otherwise the  
cable connecting the keyboard and the main body of computer will not  
return to the original position.  
SLITS  
TABS  
Figure 8-9 Removing the keyboard (2)  
Figure 8-10 Removing the keyboard (3)  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory expansion  
8. Raise the insulation sheet covering the memory module to appear the module.  
INSULATION SHEET  
Figure 8-11 Raising the insulation sheet  
9. Keep the insulation sheet raised using adhesive tape.  
Figure 8-12 Raising the insulation sheet  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
10. Insert a new module to the socket and push it downward to lie flat. Latches on  
either side will click into place to secure the module.  
Figure 8-13 Installing a memory module  
Figure 8-14 Installing two memory modules  
11. Seat the insulation sheet to cover the module.  
NOTE: Be sure to check that the insulation sheet is returned to the  
original position to cover the memory module.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory expansion  
12. Insert two tabs of the keyboard into the slits of the computer case and seat the  
keyboard at the original position. Refer to Figure 8-9 for tabs and slits. Fix it  
with three screws removed in 6.  
CAUTIONS: Be sure to use all screws that were removed in 6 and do not  
leave foreign matters such as adhesive tape used in 9 or screws removed  
and dropped in the computer.  
13. Seat the keyboard brace in the original position.  
14. Replace the battery pack as described in Chapter 6, Power and Power-up  
Modes.  
15. Turn the power on and make sure the added memory is recognized. Open  
System Properties in the Control Panel and click the General tab.  
Removing memory module  
To remove the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode then:  
1. Be sure the power is off and all cables are disconnected from the computer.  
2. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery.  
3. Follow the instructions 4 through 9 in “Installing memory module” to appear  
memorymodule.  
4. Push the latches to the outside to release the module. A spring will force one  
end of the module up.  
5. Pinch the module by the sides and pull it out.  
CAUTIONS: 1. If you use the computer for a long time, the memory  
modules and the circuits locating close to the memory  
modules will become hot. In this case, let them cool to  
room temperature before you replace them. Or you will  
get burnt if you touch any of them.  
2. Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or  
on the computer. Debris on the connectors may cause  
memory access problems.  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Figure 8-15 Removing the memory module  
6. Follow the instructions 11 through 15 in “Installing memory module”.  
Hard disk drive pack  
An extra HDD expands the flexibility of your system and lets you carry your data  
without carrying the computer.  
NOTE: Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.  
Removing the HDD pack  
To remove the HDD pack, follow the steps below and refer to figures 8-16 and 8-17.  
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn off the power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all external cables connected to the computer.  
3. Remove the main battery and optional secondary battery when it is used.  
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove one screw securing the HDD  
cover.  
5. A small row of ridges mark latches securing the cover. Press on these ridges  
until you hear a click.  
6. Press on the arrows and lift the cover up and out to remove it.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard disk drive pack  
Figure 8-16 Removing the HDD pack cover  
7. Raise the HDD’s plastic tab, pinch it and slide the HDD pack to disconnect  
from the connector.  
CAUTION: Be sure to slide the HDD pack first and confirm that the HDD  
pack has disconnected.  
8. Lift the HDD pack and remove it.  
Figure 8-17 Removing the HDD pack  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Installing the HDD pack  
To install the hard disk drive, follow the steps below.  
1. Place the HDD into the space for HDD. Slide the HDD to connect to the  
connector.  
2. Fold over the plastic tab so that it goes into the HDD space. Press the HDD to  
ensure a firm connection.  
Figure 8-18 Installing the HDD pack  
3. Seat the cover and press down until the latches click into place.  
4. Secure the cover with a screw.  
Additional battery pack  
You can increase the portability of the computer with additional battery packs. If  
you’re away from an AC power source and your battery runs low, you can replace it  
with a freshly charged battery. See Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack  
You can insert a secondary battery pack in the computer’s Slim Select Bay. The  
battery comes with an adaptor. For details on using the adaptor, follow the steps  
below. For details on inserting modules in the Slim Select Bay, refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay 2nd battery pack  
Installing  
To install the secondary battery pack in the adaptor, follow the steps below.  
1. Fit the side of the secondary battery pack opposite the connector into the  
adaptor.  
2. Lay the battery into the adaptor. The latch should close automatically to  
secure the secondary battery pack.  
Figure 8-19 Inserting the secondary battery pack in the adaptor  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Removing  
To remove the secondary battery from the adaptor, follow the steps below.  
1. Slide the latch in the direction of the arrow shown below.  
2. Push the secondary battery pack up from the bottom and lift it out.  
Figure 8-20 Removing the secondary battery pack from the adaptor  
Additional AC adaptor  
If you frequently transport the computer between different sites such as your home  
and office, purchasing an AC adaptor for each location will reduce the weight and  
bulk of your carrying load.  
Battery charger  
The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge battery packs without  
requiring the use of your computer. The battery charger holds up to two Lithium-ion  
battery packs.  
Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor  
An integrated 2 1/2" HDD is available for insertion in the Slim Select Bay.  
To install an HDD in the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor follow the steps below.  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor  
1. Slide the lock to the unlock position and open the lid.  
Figure 8-21 Opening the lid  
2. Insert the HDD and push forward to ensure a firm connection.  
Figure 8-22 Inserting the HDD  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
3. Close the lid and slide the lock to the lock position.  
Figure 8-23 Closing the lid  
For details on inserting the Slim Select Bay HDD adaptor in the Slim Select Bay, refer  
to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
External monitor  
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port on the  
computer. The computer supports VGA and Super VGA video modes. To connect a  
monitor, follow the steps below.  
1. Turn the computer off.  
2. Connect the monitor to the external monitor port.  
3. Turn the monitor’s power on.  
4. Turn the computer on.  
When you turn on the power, the computer automatically recognizes the monitor  
and determines whether it is color or monochrome.  
To change the display settings, press Fn + F5. If you disconnect the monitor  
before you turn the computer off, be sure to press Fn + F5 to switch to the internal  
display. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details on using hot keys to change  
the display setting.  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TV  
TV  
You can connect a television set to the Video out jack on the computer. Follow the  
steps below.  
Using the TOSHIBA Console button  
1. Connect the TV adaptor cable’s S Video plug to the Video out jack on the  
computer.  
2. Connect the TV adaptor cable’s S Video plug to the S Video jack on the TV.  
3. Press the TOSHIBA Console button.  
You can use the hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display device. Refer to Chapter 5,  
The Keyboard.  
NOTE: If a television is connected to the computer, set the TV type in  
Display Properties. Follow the steps below.  
a. Click start and click Control Panel.  
b. Double-click the Display icon to open the Display Properties  
window.  
c. Click the Settings tab and click the Advanced button.  
d. Click the Display Device tab.  
e. Select the TV Standard that your TV supports.  
Changing the resolution  
If you want to change the resolution, follow the steps below.  
(1) Open Display propertiesand select the Settings tab.  
(2) SelectAdvanced.  
(3) Select the Adapter tab, then select List all modes.  
(4) Select a resolution from the menu.  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of compatible  
devices such as  
Digitalvideocameras  
Hard disk drives  
MO drives  
CD-RWdrives  
NOTE: i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry  
electric current. External devices will need their own power supply.  
Precautions  
Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer. There is a  
possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a particular risk that  
some frames will be deleted in the case of digital video transfer. TOSHIBA  
assumes no liability for such loss of data.  
Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated or in  
areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.  
If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or  
disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a likeli-  
hood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub before you turn  
on the computer’s power.  
You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a video  
camera except for your personal enjoyment.  
If you connect/disconnect an iLINK device to/from another iLINK device that  
is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames might be dropped.  
Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:  
• Connect/disconnect an iLINK device to/from the computer.  
• Connect/disconnect an iLINK device to/from another iLINK device that is  
connected to the computer.  
Connecting  
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
cable into the computer.  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Port Replicator II  
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.  
Note the following when you use i.LINK:  
You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.  
Notalli.LINKdeviceshavebeentested. Therefore, compatibilitywithalli.LINK  
devices cannot be guaranteed.  
Use S100, S200 or S400 cables no longer than three meters.  
Some devices might not support standby or automatic off functions.  
Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an application  
or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to save power. Data  
might be destroyed.  
Disconnecting  
1. a. In Windows XP, open the Safety Remove Hardware icon on the Task  
Bar.  
b. In Windows 2000, open the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the  
TaskBar.  
2. Point toi.LINK(IEEE1394)deviceandclick.  
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.  
NOTE: Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.  
Advanced Port Replicator II  
In addition to the ports available on the computer, the Port Replicator provides  
audio line-out jack, line-in jack and separate ports for PS/2 mouse and PS/2 key-  
board. The Port Replicator connects directly to the docking interface on the bottom  
of the computer. The AC adaptor connects the Port Replicator to a power source.  
CAUTION: The computer must be configured properly before connecting  
to a LAN. Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings  
could cause a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN  
administrator regarding set-up procedures.  
NOTE: You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to a Port  
Replicator.  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
The following ports and accessories are available on the Port Replicator.  
RJ45LANjack  
RJ11Modemjack  
Externalmonitorport  
Parallelport  
Serialport  
PS/2 mouse port  
PS/2 keyboard port  
DC IN socket  
Security lock slot  
Audio line-in, line-out jacks  
UniversalSerialBus(two)  
IEEE1394port  
DVIport  
Parallel printer  
You can connect any standard Centronics-compatible parallel printer to your  
computer. All you need is an IBM PC parallel printer cable. Your dealer can supply  
one or you can purchase one at most computer stores.  
The cable’s connectors are designed so that it is impossible for you to connect  
them incorrectly. You can also connect a parallel printer to an optional Advanced  
Port Replicator. To connect a printer, follow these steps:  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. Insert one end of the cable into the computer’s parallel port.  
3. Tighten the screws that fasten the cable connector to the computer’s parallel  
port.  
4. Insert the other end of the cable into the printer’s parallel connector.  
5. Fasten the connector to the printer with the clips on the parallel port.  
6. Turn on the printer.  
7. Turn on the computer.  
8. Start the HW Setup program. Refer to Chapter 7 HW Setup.  
9. Select the Parallel/Printertab from the HW Setup window.  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security lock  
10. Set the mode to ECP and press OK.  
11. Choose Reboot for the change to take effect.  
Security lock  
Security locks enable you to anchor your computer and optional Advanced Port  
Replicator II to a desk or other heavy object to help prevent unauthorized removal  
of the computer or Advanced Port Replicator.  
The computer has a security lock slot on the right side. Attach one end of a cable to  
a desk and the other end to the security lock slot.  
1. Turn the computer so the right side faces you.  
2. Align the holes for the security lock and attach the lock.  
Figure 8-24 Security lock  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA designed the computer for durability. However, should problems occur,  
following the procedures in this chapter can help to determine the cause.  
All readers should become familiar with this chapter. Knowing what might go wrong  
can help prevent problems from occurring.  
Problem solving process  
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following guidelines:  
Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists. Further action may  
result in data loss or damage. You may destroy valuable problem-related  
information that can help solve the problem.  
Observe what is happening. Write down what the system is doing and what  
actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred. If you have a  
printer attached, print a copy of the screen using PrtSc.  
The questions and procedures offered in this chapter are meant as a guide, they are  
not definitive problem solving techniques. Many problems can be solved simply,  
but a few may require help from your dealer. If you find you need to consult your  
dealer or others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible.  
Preliminary checklist  
Consider the simplest solution first. The items in this checklist are easy to fix and yet  
can cause what appears to be a serious problem.  
Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the computer.  
This includes your printer and any other external device you are using.  
Before you attach an external device, turn the computer off. When you turn the  
computer back on it recognizes the new device.  
Make sure all options are set properly in the setup program.  
Check all cables. Are they correctly and firmly attached? Loose cables can  
cause signal errors.  
Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for loose pins.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Check that your diskette or CD/DVD-ROM is correctly inserted and that the  
diskette’s write protect tab is correctly set.  
Make notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log. This will  
help you describe your problems to your dealer. If a problem recurs, the log will help  
you identify the problem faster.  
Analyzing the problem  
Sometimes the system gives clues that can help you identify why it is malfunction-  
ing. Keep the following questions in mind:  
Which part of the system is not operating properly: keyboard, diskette drives,  
hard disk drive, optical media drive, display. Each device produces different  
symptoms.  
Is the operating system configuration set properly? Check the configuration  
options.  
What appears on the display screen? Does it display any messages or random  
characters? Print a copy of the screen if you have a printer attached. Look up  
the messages in the software and operating system documentation. Check that  
all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached. Loose cables can cause  
erroneous or intermittent signals.  
Do any indicators light? Which ones? What color are they? Do they stay on or  
blink? Write down what you see.  
Do you hear any beeps? How many? Are they long or short? Are they high  
pitched or low? Is the computer making any unusual noises? Write down what  
you hear.  
Record your observations so you can describe them to your dealer.  
Software The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If  
you cannot load a software package, the media may be  
damaged or the program might be corrupted. Try loading  
another copy of the software.  
If an error message appears while you are using a software  
package, check the software documentation. These  
documents usually include a problem solving section or a  
summary of error messages.  
Next, check any error messages in the OS documentation.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Hardware If you cannot find a software problem, check your hard-  
ware. First run through the items in the preliminary  
checklist above. If you still cannot correct the problem, try  
to identify the source. The next section provides checklists  
for individual components and peripherals.  
Hardware and system checklist  
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or attached  
peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:  
System start-up  
Self test  
PCcard  
Infrared port  
Dual Pointing device  
USB  
Power  
Password  
Keyboard  
Memoryexpansion  
Sound system  
Monitor  
LCDpanel  
Hard disk drive  
CD-ROMdrive  
DVD-ROMdrive  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive  
DVDMultidrive  
Diskette drive  
SDcard  
i.LINK(IEEE1394)  
Modem  
LAN  
WirelessLAN  
Bluetooth  
Realtimeclock(RTC)  
System start-up  
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:  
SelfTest  
Power Sources  
Power-on Password  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Self test  
When the computer starts up, the self test will be run automatically, and the  
followingwillbedisplayed:  
In Touch with Tomorrow  
TOSHIBA  
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.  
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system,  
depending on how the Boot Priority is set in the TOSHIBA HW Setup program.  
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test failed:  
The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or messages  
except the TOSHIBA logo.  
Random characters appear on the screen, and the system does not function  
normally.  
The screen displays an error message.  
Turn off the computer and check all cable connections as well as PC card and  
memory module connections. If the test fails again, contact your dealer.  
Power  
When the computer is not plugged into an AC outlet, the battery pack is the primary  
power source. However, your computer has a number of other power resources,  
including intelligent power supply, Real Time Clock battery. These resources are  
interrelated and any one could affect apparent power problems. This section  
provides check lists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot resolve a problem  
after following them, the cause could lie with another power resource. In such case,  
contact your dealer.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Overheating power down  
If the computer’s internal temperature becomes too high, the computer will automati-  
cally shut down.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computershutsdown Leave the computer off until the computer  
and DC IN 15V indicator reaches room temperature, then turn it back on.  
blinksorange  
If the computer is still too warm, the DC IN 15V  
indicator will continue blinking when you turn on  
the power. Let it cool longer and try again.  
If the computer has reached room temperature  
and still does not start, or if it starts but shuts  
down quickly, contact your dealer.  
AC power  
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected, check  
the DC IN 15V indicator. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more  
information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
AC adaptor doesn’t  
powerthecomputer  
(DC IN 15V indicator  
doesnotglowgreen)  
Check the connections. Make sure the cord  
is firmly connected to the computer and a  
poweroutlet.  
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If  
the cord is frayed or damaged, replace it. If the  
terminals are soiled, wipe them with cotton or a  
clean cloth.  
If the AC adaptor still does not power the com-  
puter, contact your dealer.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Battery  
If you suspect a problem with the battery, check the DC IN 15V indicator as well as  
the Battery and Slim Select Bay indicators. For information on indicators and  
battery operation see Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t  
powerthecomputer  
The battery may be discharged. Connect the  
AC adaptor to charge the battery.  
Battery doesn’t  
If the battery is completely discharged, it will  
not begin charging at once. Wait a few minutes.  
charge when the AC  
adaptor is attached  
(Battery or Slim  
If the battery still does not charge, make sure the  
outlet is supplying power. Plug in an appliance  
Select Bay indicator  
doesnotgloworange.) and see if it works. If it doesn’t, try another power  
source.  
Check whether the battery is hot or cold. If the  
battery is too hot or too cold, it will not charge  
properly. Let it reach room temperature.  
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to  
make sure the terminals are clean. If necessary  
wipe them with a soft dry cloth dipped in alcohol.  
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery.  
Make sure the battery is securely seated.  
If the indicator still does not glow, the battery may  
be at the end of its operating life. Replace it.  
If you do not think the battery is at the end of its  
operating life, see your dealer.  
Battery doesn’t  
powerthecomputer  
as long as expected  
Check the power consumption settings in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility. Consider using a  
powersavingmode.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Password  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannotenter  
Contactyourdealer.  
orforgotpassword  
NOTE 1: For information on setting a password,  
refertoChapter6,PowerandPower-UpModes,  
starting the computer by Password, TOSHIBA  
PasswordUtility.  
NOTE 2: If you have made a token already, you  
can use it for authentication when the computer  
asks you to enter password.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard problems can be caused by your setup configuration. For more informa-  
tion refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some letter keys  
producenumbers  
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not  
selected. Press Fn + F10 and try typing again.  
Output to screen  
isgarbled  
Make sure the software you are using is not  
remappingthekeyboard.Remappinginvolves  
reassigning the meaning of each key. See your  
software’sdocumentation.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, consult  
yourdealer.  
LCD panel  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Press hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display  
priority, to make sure it is not set for an external  
monitor.  
Markingsappearon  
theLCD.  
They might have come from contact with the  
keyboard or Dual Pointing Device. Try wiping the  
LCD gently with a clean dry cloth. If markings  
remain, use LCD cleaner. Be sure to let the LCD  
dry before closing it.  
Problemsabove  
remainunresolved  
orotherproblems  
occur  
Refer to your software’s documentation to  
determine if the software is causing the  
difficulty.  
Contact your dealer if the problems continue.  
Hard disk drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computerdoesnot  
boot from hard disk  
drive  
Check if a diskette is in the diskette drive or a  
CD-ROM is in the optical media drive. Remove  
any diskette and/or CD-ROM and check Boot  
priority. Refer to Chapter 7, Boot Priority.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
There may be a problem with your operating  
system files. Refer to your OS documentation.  
Slowperformance  
Your files may be fragmented. Run SCANDISK  
and defragmenter to check the condition of your  
files and disk. Refer to your OS documentation  
or online HELP for information on running  
SCANDISKandthedefragmenter.  
As a last resort, reformat the hard disk. Then,  
reload the operating system and other files.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
CD-ROM drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
a CD in the drive  
Make sure the drive's drawer is securely  
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Open the drawer and make sure the CD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the drawer could block laser  
light from reading the CD. Make sure there is no  
obstruction.Removeanyforeignobject.  
Check whether the CD is dirty. If necessary, wipe  
it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. See the Media care section in Chapter 4  
for details on cleaning.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Check your config.sys and autoexec.bat files to  
make sure they have the necessary drivers and  
execution lines.  
Some CDs  
run correctly, but  
others do not  
Thesoftwareorhardwareconfigurationmay  
be causing a problem. Make sure the  
hardwareconfigurationmatch’syoursoftware’s  
needs. Check the CD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD you are using. The drive  
supports:  
CD-EXTRA,PhotoCD,CD-R(readonly),CD-ROM,  
CD-Rewritable(readonly),CD-ROMxA,CD-DA,  
CD-I,CD-Text  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
DVD-ROM drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s drawer is securely  
a CD/DVD in the drive closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Open the drawer and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facingup.  
A foreign object in the drawer could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe  
it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. See the Media care section in Chapter 4  
for details on cleaning.  
SomeCD/DVDs  
run correctly, but  
others do not  
Thesoftwareorhardwareconfigurationmay  
be causing a problem. Make sure the  
hardwareconfigurationmatchesyoursoftware’s  
needs. Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drivesupports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM,DVD-Video  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, PhotoCD(single/  
multi-session),CD-ROMMode1,  
Mode2, CD-ROMXAMode2  
(Form1,Form2),EnhancedCD(CD-  
EXTRA),CD-G(AudioCDonly),  
AddressingMethod2  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD-ROM drive. Region codes  
are listed in the Optical media section in Chapter  
2, The Grand Tour.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
CD-RW/DVD-ROM drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s drawer is securely  
a CD/DVD in the drive closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Open the drawer and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facingup.  
A foreign object in the drawer could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe  
it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. See the Media care section in Chapter 4  
for details on cleaning.  
SomeCD/DVDs  
run correctly, but  
others do not  
Thesoftwareorhardwareconfigurationmay  
be causing a problem. Make sure the  
hardwareconfigurationmatchesyoursoftware’s  
needs. Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drivesupports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM,DVD-Video  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, PhotoCD(single/  
multi-session),CD-ROMMode1,  
Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode 2  
(Form1,Form2),EnhancedCD(CD-  
EXTRA),CD-G(AudioCDonly),  
AddressingMethod2  
Recordable: CD-R,CD-RW  
CD  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
matchthatontheCD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive.  
Region codes are listed in the Optical media  
section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Cannot write correctly If you have trouble writing, make sure you are  
observingthefollowingprecautions:  
• Use only media recommended by TOSHIBA.  
• Do not use the mouse or keyboard during  
writing.  
• Use only the software supplied with the  
computerforrecording.  
• Do not run or start other software during  
writing.  
• Do not jar the computer during writing.  
• Do not connect/ disconnect external devices or  
install/removeinternalcardsduringwriting.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
DVD Multi drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s drawer is securely  
a CD/DVD in the drive closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Open the drawer and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facingup.  
A foreign object in the drawer could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe  
it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. See the Media care section in Chapter 4  
for details on cleaning.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
SomeCD/DVDs  
run correctly, but  
others do not  
Thesoftwareorhardwareconfigurationmay  
be causing a problem. Make sure the  
hardwareconfigurationmatchesyoursoftware’s  
needs. Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drivesupports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM,DVD-Video  
Recordable: DVD-R,DVD-RW,DVD-RAM  
DVD  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, PhotoCD(single/  
multi-session),CD-ROMMode1,  
Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode 2  
(Form1,Form2),EnhancedCD(CD-  
EXTRA),CD-G(AudioCDonly),  
AddressingMethod2  
Recordable: CD-R,CD-RW  
CD  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
matchthatontheCD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive.  
Region codes are listed in the Optical media  
section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
Cannot write correctly If you have trouble writing, make sure you are  
observingthefollowingprecautions:  
• Use only media recommended by TOSHIBA.  
• Do not use the mouse or keyboard during  
writing.  
• Use only the software supplied with the  
computerforrecording.  
• Do not run or start other software during  
writing.  
• Do not jar the computer during writing.  
• Do not connect/ disconnect external devices  
orinstall/removeinternalcardsduringwriting.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Diskette drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Drivedoesnot  
operate  
There may be a faulty cable connection. Check  
the connection to the computer and to the drive.  
You cannot access  
the external 3 1/2"  
diskettedrive  
Try another diskette. If you can access the  
diskette, the original diskette (not the drive) is  
probablycausingtheproblem.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
SD card  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
SD card  
erroroccurs  
Reseat the SD card to make sure it is firmly  
connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot write  
to an SD card  
Make sure the card is not write protected.  
You cannot read  
a file  
Make sure the target file is on the SD  
Card inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
PC card  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
PC card  
erroroccurs  
Reseat the PC card to make sure it is  
firmlyconnected.  
Make sure the connection between the external  
device and the card is firm.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Infrared port  
Refer also to the documentation for your IrDA compatible device and related  
software.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Infrareddevicesdo  
Make sure there is no obstruction blocking  
not work as expected communication between the computer and the  
targetdevice.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device  
If you are using a USB mouse, also refer to the USB section in this chapter and to  
your mouse documentation.  
Touch Pad/AccuPoint  
Problem  
Procedure  
Either the Touch Pad  
or the AccuPoint  
does not work.  
Check the Device Select settings. Open the  
Mouse properties icon and click the Dual Point  
tab. Then click the Detail Setting button and  
click the Device Select tab.  
Check that the Touch Pad is not selected.  
Pressing Fn + F9 to enables TOSHIBA Dual  
PointingDevice.  
On-screenpointer  
does not respond to  
Padoperation  
The system might be busy. If the pointer is  
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to resume  
its normal shape and try again to move it.  
Themousepointer  
moves too fast or  
too slow  
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse  
control utility.  
1. Open the Control Panel, select the Mouse  
icon and press Enter.  
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the speed as instructed and click OK.  
Double-tapping  
(TouchPad)or  
double-clicking  
(AccuPoint)  
Try changing the double-click speed setting in  
the mouse control utility.  
1. Open the Control Panel, select the Mouse  
icon and press Enter.  
does not work  
2. Click the Buttons tab.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
3. Set the double-click speed as instructed and  
click OK.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
USB mouse  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screenpointer  
does not respond to  
mouseoperation  
The system might be busy. If the pointer is  
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to resume  
its normal shape and try again to move it.  
Make sure the mouse is properly connected to  
the USB port.  
Double-clicking  
does not work  
Try changing the double-click speed setting in  
the mouse control utility.  
1. Open the Control Panel, select the Mouse  
icon and press Enter.  
2. Click the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as instructed and  
click OK.  
Themousepointer  
moves too fast or  
too slow  
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse  
control utility.  
1. Open the Control Panel, select the Mouse  
icon and press Enter.  
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the speed as instructed and click OK.  
Themousepointer  
moveserratically  
The mouse might be dirty. Refer to your mouse  
documentations for instructions on cleaning.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
USB  
Refer also to your USB device’s documentation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
USBdevicedoes  
not work  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
USB ports on the computer and the USB device.  
Make sure the USB device drivers are properly  
installed. Refer to your Windows XP documenta-  
tion for information on checking the drivers.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Memory expansion  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, for information on installing memory  
modules.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Beep sounds.  
(Two beeps, a dash  
and a dot, for a  
defectivememory  
module in slot A.  
Three beeps, a dash  
Make sure the memory module installed in the  
expansion slot is compatible with the computer.  
If an incompatible module has been installed,  
follow the steps below.  
1. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all  
peripheraldevices  
and two dots for slot B. 2. Removethebattery.  
Whenbothbeepssound, 3. Removethememorymodule.  
both memories in slot A 4. Replace the battery and/or connect the AC  
andBaredefective.)  
adaptor.  
5. Turnonthepower.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Sound system  
Refer also to documentation for your audio devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
Check the software volume settings.  
Make sure the headphone connection is secure.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Annoyingsound  
is heard  
You may be experiencing feedback. Refer to  
Using the microphone in Chapter 4, Operating  
Basics.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Monitor  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, and to your monitor’s documentation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Monitor does not  
turnon  
Make sure that the external monitor’s power  
switch is on. Confirm that the external monitor’s  
power cable is plugged into a working power  
outlet.  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the external monitor.  
Press hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display  
priority and make sure it is not set for the internal  
display.  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
Display error occurs  
Check that the cable connecting the external  
monitor to the computer is attached firmly.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
Problem  
Procedure  
i.LINKdevicedoes  
notfunction  
Make sure the cable is securely connected to  
the computer and to the device.  
Make sure the device’s power is turned on.  
Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows Control  
Panel and double-click the Add Hardware icon.  
Follow the on-screen directions.  
Restart Windows.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Modem  
Refer to the online help files for Appendix C and D.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Communication  
softwarecan’t  
initialize modem  
Make sure the computer’s internal modem  
settings are correct. Refer to Phone and Modem  
Properties in the Control Panel.  
You can hear a dial  
tone but can’t make  
a call  
If the call is going through a PBX machine, make  
sure the communication application’s tone dial  
detection feature is disabled.  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
You can also use the ATX command. Refer to the  
online help files for Appendix C, AT Commands.  
You place a call,  
but a connection  
can’t be made  
Make sure the settings are correct in your  
communicationsapplication.  
After making a call  
you can’t hear a ring  
Make sure the tone or pulse selection in your  
communications application is set correctly.  
You can also use the ATD command. Refer to  
the online help files for Appendix C, AT Com-  
mands.  
Communicationis  
cut off unexpectedly  
The computer will automatically cut off  
communication when connection with the carrier  
is not successful for a set time interval. Try  
lengtheningthistimeinterval.  
A CONNECT display  
is quickly replaced by  
NO CARRIER  
Check the error control setting in your  
communications application.  
You can also use the AT\N command. Refer to  
the online help files for Appendix C, AT Com-  
mands.  
Characterdisplay  
becomesgarbled  
duringa  
In data transmission, make sure the parity bit  
and stop bit settings correspond with those  
of the remote computer.  
communication  
Check the flow control and communication  
protocol.  
Youcannotreceive  
an incoming call  
Check the rings before auto answer setting in  
your communications application.  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware and system checklist  
You can also use the ATS0 command. Refer to  
the online help files for Appendix D, S-registers.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
LAN  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access LAN  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
LAN jack and the LAN HUB.  
Wake-up on LAN  
does not work  
Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even  
when the system is off.  
If problems persist, consult your LAN administra-  
tor.  
Wireless LAN  
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN adminis-  
trator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to Chapter 4, Operat-  
ing Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Wireless LAN  
Make sure the computer’s wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
If problems persist, contact your LAN administra-  
toror dealer.  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Bluetooth  
For more information on wireless communication, refer to Chapter 4, Operating  
Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Bluetoothdevice  
Make sure the computer’s wireless communica-  
tion switch is set to on.  
Make sure the Bluetooth Manager is running and  
the power to the Bluetooth device is turned on.  
Make sure no optional Bluetooth PC card is  
installed in the computer. The built-in Bluetooth  
function and an optional Bluetooth PC card  
cannotoperatesimutaneously.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Real Time Clock  
Problem  
Procedure  
Thefollowingmessageis The battery for RTC is wearing. Set the date and time  
Displayed on the LCD:  
RTC battery is low or  
CMOS checksum is  
inconsistentPress [F1]  
key to set Date/Time.  
in BIOS setup with the following steps:  
1. Press [F1] key. BIOS setup will boot up.  
2. Set the date in [System Date].  
3.Set the time in [System Time].  
4. Press [Fn] + [R] keys ([End] key function).  
Confirmationmessagewillappear.  
5. Press [Y] key. BIOS setup will terminate and the  
computerwillberebooted.  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA support  
TOSHIBA support  
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having  
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for additional  
technical assistance.  
Before you call  
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating system,  
it is important to investigate other sources of assistance first. Before contacting  
TOSHIBA,trythefollowing:  
Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation for software and  
peripheraldevices.  
If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult the  
software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions. Call the software  
company’s technical support for assistance.  
Consult the dealer you purchased your computer and/or software from. They  
are your best sources for current information and support.  
Where to write  
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware related,  
write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:  
China  
OutsideofEurope  
TOSHIBAComputerSystems  
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
Australia  
TOSHIBAAustraliaPty.Ltd.  
InformationSystemsDivision  
84-92TalaveraRoad  
NorthRydeN.S.W.2113  
Sydney  
Bldg.33,No.351,JinzangRoad,  
Pudong New Area,  
Shanghai,  
P.R.China201206  
Singapore  
Canada  
TOSHIBASingaporePte.Ltd.  
438BAlexandraRoad#06-01  
AlexandraTechnopark  
Singapore119968  
TOSHIBAofCanadaLtd.  
191McNabbStreet,  
Markham,Ontario  
L3R8H2  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
UnitedStatesofAmerica  
UnitedKingdom  
TOSHIBAAmericaInformation  
Systems, Inc.  
TOSHIBAInformationSystems(U.K.)  
Ltd.  
9740IrvineBoulevard  
Irvine,California92618  
USA  
TOSHIBACourt  
Weybridge Business Park  
Addlestone Road  
InEurope  
Weybridge,SurreyKT152UL  
TheRestofEurope  
Germany&Austria  
TOSHIBAEurope(I.E.)GmbH  
TOSHIBAEurope(I.E.)GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich,  
Geschäftsbereich,  
Deutschland-Österreich  
Hammfelddamm8,  
Deutschland-Österreich  
Hammfelddamm8,  
D-41460Neuss,Germany  
France  
D-41460Neuss,Germany  
TOSHIBASystèmsFranceS.A.  
7,RueAmpèreB.P.131,  
92804PuteauxCedex  
Netherlands  
TOSHIBAInformationSystems,  
BeneluxB.V.  
RiviumBoulevard  
412909LKCapellea/dIJssel  
Spain  
TOSHIBAInformationSystems,  
ESPAÑA  
ParqueEmpresarialSanFernando  
EdificioEuropa,la Planta,  
EscaleraA28830Madrid  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.  
Physical Dimensions  
Weight (typical) 2.6kilograms,configuredwith:14"XGA,256MB  
RAM,30GBHDD,DVD-ROMdrive,modem,LAN,  
6-cellbattery  
2.8kilograms,configuredwith:14"SXGA,256MBRAM,  
30GBHDD,CD-RW/DVDdrive,modem,LAN,9-cell  
battery  
Weight will vary with other configurations. Above  
weights are measured at a specific criteria. They are  
not guaranteed as the maximum weight of the  
actual product.  
Size 312(w)x274(d)x36.5/39.8(h)millimeters(not  
including parts that extend beyond the main body)  
Environmental Requirements  
Ambient  
Conditions temperature  
Relative  
humidity  
Operating 5°C(41°F)to3C(95°F)  
Non-operating -20°C(-4°F)to6C(149°F)  
ThermalGradient 20°C perhourmaximum  
Wet-bulb temperature 26°Cmaximum  
Conditions Altitude(fromsealevel)  
Operating -60to3,000meters  
20%to80%  
10%to95%  
Non-operating -60to10,000metersmaximum  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Power Requirements  
AC adaptor 100-240voltsAC  
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)  
Computer 15VDC  
5.0amperes  
Built-in Modem  
Networkcontrolunit(NCU)  
Type of NCU AA  
Type of line Telephone line (analog only)  
Type of dialing Pulse  
Tone  
Controlcommand AT commands  
EIA-578commands  
Monitor function Computer’s speaker  
Communicationspecifications  
Communication Data:  
system Fax:  
Fullduplex  
Halfduplex  
Communication Data  
protocol  
ITU-T-Rec  
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32  
(FormerCCITT)  
Bell  
/V.32bis/V.34/V.90  
103/212A  
Fax  
ITU-T-Rec  
(FormerCCITT)  
V.17/V.29/V.27ter  
/V.21ch2  
Communication Data transmission and reception  
speed 300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/  
16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/  
33600bps  
Data reception only with V.90  
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/37333/  
38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/46666/48000/  
49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/56000bps  
Fax  
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400bps  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Transmittinglevel -10dBm  
Receivinglevel -10to-40dBm  
Input/output 600ohms±30%  
impedance  
Errorcorrecting MNPclass4andITU-TV.42  
Data compression MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis  
Power supply +3.3V(suppliedbycomputer)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and  
Modes  
Display controller  
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware commands that  
turn particular pels on or off.  
The controller is an advanced Video Graphics Array (VGA) that provides Super  
VGA(SVGA)andExtendedGraphicsArray(XGA),SuperExtendedGraphicsArray  
(SXGA), SuperExtendedGraphicsArrayplus(SXGA+), supportfortheinternal  
LCDandexternalmonitors.  
Twomodelsareavailable:  
14.1"XGA,1024horizontalx768verticalpixels  
14.1"SXGA+,1400horizontalx1050verticalpixels  
NOTE: Because of the LCD’s increased resolution, lines may appear  
broken in DOS mode.  
A high-resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display up to  
2048horizontaland1536verticalpixelsatupto16Mcolors.  
The display controller also controls the video mode, which uses industry standard  
rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of colors that can be  
displayed on screen.  
Software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that supports the  
mode.  
The computer’s display controller supports all VGA and SVGA modes, the most  
widely used industry standards.  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Video modes  
The computer supports video modes defined in the tables below. If your application  
offers a selection of mode numbers that do not match the numbers on the table,  
select a mode based on mode type, resolution, character matrix, number of colors  
and refresh rates. Also, if your software supports both graphics and text modes, the  
screen display may appear to operate faster using a text mode.  
Table1 Video modes (VGA)  
Video Type Resolution  
mode  
Character LCD  
CRT  
colors  
Scanning  
frequency  
Vertical (Hz)  
matrix  
(pels)  
colors  
0, 1  
2, 3  
VGA 40 x 25  
8 x 8  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
Text  
Characters  
VGA 80 x 25  
8 x 8  
Text  
Characters  
0*, 1* VGA 40 x 25  
8 x 14  
8 x 14  
9 x 16  
9 x 16  
8 x 8  
Text  
Characters  
2*, 3* VGA 80 x 25  
Text  
Characters  
0+, 1+ VGA 40 x 25  
Text  
Characters  
2+, 3+ VGA 80 x 25  
Text  
Characters  
4, 5  
6
VGA 320 x 200  
Grph Pels  
4 of 256K  
2 of 256K  
4 of 256K  
2 of 256K  
70  
70  
VGA 640 x 200  
Grph Pels  
8 x 8  
7
VGA 80 x 25  
9 x 14  
9 x 16  
Mono  
Mono  
Mono  
Mono  
70  
70  
Text  
VGA 80 x 25  
Text Characters  
Characters  
7+  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Table1 Video modes (VGA) continued  
Video Type Resolution  
mode  
Character LCD  
CRT  
colors  
Scanning  
frequency  
Vertical (Hz)  
matrix  
(pels)  
colors  
D
E
VGA 320 x 200  
Grph Pels  
8 x 8  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
VGA 640 x 200  
Grph Pels  
8 x 8  
F
VGA 640 x 350  
Grph Pels  
8 x 14  
8 x 14  
Mono  
Mono  
70  
10  
VGA 640 x 350  
Grph Pels  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 70  
11  
12  
VGA 640 x 480  
Grph Pels  
VGA 640 x 480  
Grph Pels  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
2 of 256K  
2 of 256K  
60  
16 of 256K 16 of 256K 60  
256 of 256K 256 of 256K 70  
13  
VGA 320 x 200  
Grph Pels  
8 x 8  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Table 2 Video modes (XGA)  
CRT  
Resolution  
LCD  
Vertical  
colors  
colors  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
1600 x 1200  
60  
75  
85  
100  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
100  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
60  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Table 2 Video modes (XGA) continued  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
1600 x 1200  
60  
75  
85  
100  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
100  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
60  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Table 2 Video modes (XGA) continued  
Resolution  
LCD  
CRT  
Vertical  
colors  
colors  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
1600 x 1200  
60  
75  
85  
100  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
100  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
60  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Table 3 Video modes (Super XGA+)  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
60  
256/256K  
(Virtual)  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Table 3 Video modes (Super XGA+) continued  
Resolution  
LCD  
CRT  
Vertical  
colors  
colors  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
60  
64K/64K  
(Virtual)  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Table 3 Video modes (Super XGA+) continued  
Resolution  
LCD  
CRT  
Vertical  
colors  
colors  
frequency (Hz)  
640 x 480  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 x 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
60  
75  
85  
1920 x 1440  
2048 x 1536  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
60  
16M/16M  
(Virtual)  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
AT Commands  
In most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However,  
there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.  
This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice commands  
are taken care of by application software.  
The format for entering AT commands is:  
ATXn  
where X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command. After  
you type in the command press Enter.  
Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or numeric  
values known as result codes.  
All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are described in  
this section; any entry other than those listed results in an error.  
+++ Escape sequence  
The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter  
on-line command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can  
communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you  
finish, you can return to data mode using the ATO command.  
A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must  
be completed after an escape sequence is entered, This pause prevents  
the modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.  
The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using  
registerS2.  
A/ Repeat last command  
This command repeats the last command string entered. Do not  
precede this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing  
Enter.  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
A
Answer command  
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an  
incomingcall.  
Bn Communication standard setting  
This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.  
B0  
Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.  
Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).  
Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.  
B1  
B15  
B16  
Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,15,16  
ERROR Otherwise  
Dn Dial  
This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n  
(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.  
Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone  
digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not  
count. They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include  
them to make the number and modifiers easier to read.  
The following may be used as phone number modifiers:  
P
T
,
Pulsedialing.  
Touch-tone dialing (default).  
Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8  
before processing the next character in the dial string.  
W
@
Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before  
processing the dial string.  
Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after  
dialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modem  
sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.  
!
Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5 seconds  
and then return to off-hook.  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
;
Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to  
command mode after dialing a number, without disconnecting  
the call.  
S=n  
Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=X  
command(See&Zn=Xcommandformoreinformation).The  
range is 0-3.  
En Echo command  
This command controls whether or not the characters entered from  
your computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while  
the modem is in command mode.  
E0  
E1  
Disables echo to the computer.  
Enables echo to the computer (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
Hn Hook control  
This command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call,  
or off-hook to make the phone line busy.  
H0  
H1  
Modem goes on-hook (default).  
Modem goes off-hook.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
In Request ID information  
This command displays product information about the modem.  
I0  
I3  
I9  
Returns modem identity string and driver version number.  
Same as I0.  
Returns region ID in English.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3,9  
ERROR Otherwise  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Ln Monitor speaker volume  
This command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.  
L0  
L1  
L2  
L3  
Lowvolume.  
Lowvolume.(SameasL0)  
Mediumvolume(default).  
Highvolume.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROR Otherwise  
Mn Monitor speaker mode  
This command turns the speaker on or off.  
M0  
M1  
The speaker is off.  
The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal  
(default).  
M2  
M3  
The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.  
Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when dialing.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROR Otherwise  
Nn Modulation handshake  
This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a  
negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when  
the communication speed of the two modems is different.  
N0  
When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at  
the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command.  
N1  
When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the  
communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command(default).  
During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be  
selected.  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
On Return on-line to data mode  
O0  
O1  
O3  
Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and return  
to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).  
This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line data  
mode.  
This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to  
on-line data mode.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1,3  
ERROR  
Otherwise  
P
Select pulse dialing  
This command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone)  
dialing. Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is  
received. Tone dial is the default setting.  
Qn Result code control  
Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and  
displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK, CONNECT,  
RING, NO CARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the  
user to turn result codes on or off.  
Q0  
Enables modem to send result codes to the computer (de-  
fault).  
Q1  
Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
T
Select tone dialing  
This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing.  
Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is  
received. This is the default setting.  
Vn DCE response format  
This command controls whether result codes (including call progress  
and negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their  
numeric equivalents.  
V0  
V1  
Displays result codes as digits.  
Displays result codes as text (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
Xn Result code selection, call progress monitoring  
This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.  
Command Dial tone  
detect  
Busysignal SupportedResult  
detect  
Code  
X0  
X1  
X2  
X3  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,  
ERROR  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,  
BLACKLISTED  
X4 (default) Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT  
<RATE>, DELAYED, BLACKLISTED,  
REORDER, WARBLE, CALL WAITING  
DETECTED  
C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
X5  
Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT  
<RATE>, RRING, NO BONGTONE,  
DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER,  
WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED  
Dial tone detect  
Disabled: The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a  
dial tone.  
Enabled: The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and  
disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within  
10 seconds.  
Busy tone detect  
Disabled: The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.  
Enabled: The modem monitors for busy tones.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5  
Otherwise  
ERROR  
Zn Recall stored profile  
The modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configura-  
tion profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is  
specified, zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) control  
Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer  
indicating that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem.  
DCD normally turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier  
signal.  
&C0  
The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored.  
DCD circuit is always on.  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
&C1  
DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is  
detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
&Dn DTR control  
This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the  
DTR signal and changes to the DTR signal.  
&D0  
Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats  
it as always on. This should only be used if your communica-  
tion software does not provide DTR to the modem  
&D1  
If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem enters command mode, issues an OK result code,  
and remains connected.  
&D2  
&D3  
If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem disconnects (default).  
Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROR Otherwise  
&F Load factory settings  
This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the  
factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the S-  
register settings in the active configuration with factory values.  
&F  
Recall factory setting as active configuration.  
C-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
&Gn V.22bis guard tone control  
This command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while  
transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only  
used in V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North  
America and is for international use only.  
&G0  
&G1  
&G2  
Guard tone disabled (default).  
Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.  
Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROR Otherwise  
&Kn Local flow control selection  
&K0  
&K3  
&K4  
Disableflowcontrol.  
EnableCTS/RTSflowcontrol(default).  
EnableXON/XOFFflowcontrol.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3,4  
ERROR Otherwise  
&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)  
&P0  
&P1  
&P2  
Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second.  
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second.  
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROR Otherwise  
&Tn Self-test commands  
These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic  
data loss or random errors.  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
&T0  
&T1  
Abort. Stops any test in progress.  
Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as well  
as the connection between the modem and computer. Any  
data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then demodulated,  
and returned to the local DTE. To work properly, the modem  
must be off-line.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0  
CONNECT  
ERROR  
n=1  
Otherwise  
&V Display Current Configuration  
This command displays the current configuration of the modem. If  
nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as  
well.  
&V View profiles.  
&W Store current configuration  
Saves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Regis-  
ters.  
The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters  
illustrated in the &V command. These settings are restored to the  
active configuration upon receiving a Zn command or at power up.  
Refer to the &V command.  
&W  
Stores the current configuration.  
&Zn=x  
Store telephone number  
This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the  
modem’s nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the  
command is &Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which  
the number should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34  
characters. The ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in  
location n.  
Result codes:  
OK  
n=0, 1, 2, 3  
ERROR Otherwise  
C-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
\Nn Error control mode selection  
This command determines the type of error control used by the modem  
when sending or receiving data.  
\N0  
\N1  
\N2  
Buffer mode. No error control.  
Directmode.  
MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect  
using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the  
modem disconnects.  
This is also known as MNP reliable mode.  
V.42,MNP,orbuffered(default).  
\N3  
\N4  
The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode. If  
this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it  
connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is also  
known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).  
V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42  
error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.  
\N5  
\N7  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as\N3).  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as\N3).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7  
ERROR Otherwise  
\Qn Local flow control selection  
\Q0  
\Q1  
\Q3  
Disableflowcontrol.  
XON/XOFFsoftwareflowcontrol.  
CTS/RTStoDTE(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,3  
ERROR Otherwise  
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
\Vn Protocol result code  
\V0  
\V1  
Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.  
Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROR Otherwise  
%B View numbers in blacklist  
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for  
which the last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR  
result code appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.  
%Cn  
Data compression control  
This command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5  
data compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a discon-  
nect occurs first.  
%C0  
%C3  
V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.  
V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,3  
ERROR Otherwise  
C-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
S-registers  
S-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions of the  
internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the telephone ring  
before the modem answers and how long to wait before it hangs up if a connec-  
tion fails. You can also customize certain AT commands such as the escape  
sequence and command line termination.  
The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify  
corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose,  
however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually when  
the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable range, then  
an error is generated.  
This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.  
S-register values  
The format for displaying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn?  
where n is the register number. After you type in the register press Enter.  
The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn=r  
where n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you type in  
the register and its new value press Enter.  
NOTE: Some registers vary from one country/region to another.  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
S0 Auto answer ring number  
This register determines the number of rings the modem will count  
before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want  
the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled, the modem  
can only answer with an ATA command.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 0  
Units: rings  
S1 Ring counter  
This register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with each  
ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register is  
cleared.  
Range: 0-225  
Default: 0  
Units: rings  
S2 AT escape character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape se-  
quence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence allows the  
modem to exit data mode and enter command mode when on-line.  
Values greater than 127 disable the escape sequence.  
Range: 0-255,ASCIIdecimal  
Default: 43  
Units: ASCII  
S3 Command line termination character  
(user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return  
character. This character is used to end command lines and result  
codes.  
Range: 0-127,ASCIIdecimal  
Default: 13(carriagereturn)  
Units: ASCII  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
S4 Response formatting character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed charac-  
ter. The modem uses a line feed character in command mode when it  
responds to the computer.  
Range: 0-127,ASCIIdecimal  
Default: 10(linefeed)  
Units: ASCII  
S5 Command line editing character (user defined)  
This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and pertains  
to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the backspace  
character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32 ASCII. This  
character can be used to edit a command line. When the echo com-  
mand is enabled, the modem echoes back to the local DTE the back-  
space character, an ASCII space character, and a second backspace  
character. This means a total of three characters are transmitted each  
time the modem processes the backspace character.  
Range: 0-127,ASCIIdecimal  
Default: 8 (backspace)  
Units: ASCII  
S6 Wait before dialing  
This register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem must  
wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit of the  
telephone number. The modem always pauses for a minimum of two  
seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two seconds. The wait for  
dial tone call progress feature (W dial modifier in the dial string) will  
override the value in register S6. This operation, however, may be  
affected by some ATX options according to country/region restric-  
tions. In some countries/regions, S6 will set dial tone detect time.  
Range:  
Default:  
Units:  
3-255  
3
seconds  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
S7 Connection completion time-out  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait  
before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is started  
when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes off-hook (an-  
swer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection of an answer  
tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also specifies the wait  
for silence time for the @ dial modifier in seconds. S7 is not associated  
with the W dial modifier.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 50  
Units: seconds  
S8 Comma pause time  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must pause  
when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string. In some  
countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and comma  
pause time.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 2  
Units: seconds  
S11 DTMF dialing speed  
This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for each  
country/region.  
Range: 50-255  
Default: 95  
Units: .001 seconds  
S12 Escape guard time  
This register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the  
required pause after the escape sequence.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 50  
Units: .02 seconds  
D-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
S37 Dial line rate  
S37=0(default)  
S37=1  
maximummodemspeed  
reserved  
S37=2  
1200/75bps  
300 bps  
S37=3  
S37=4  
reserved  
S37=5  
1200bps  
S37=6  
2400bps  
S37=7  
4800bps  
S37=8  
7200bps  
S37=9  
9600bps  
S37=10  
S37=11  
S37=12  
S37=13  
S37=14  
S37=15  
S37=16  
S37=17  
S37=18  
S37=19  
12000bps  
14400bps  
16800bps  
19200bps  
21600bps  
24000bps  
26400bps  
28800bps  
31200bps  
33600bps  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
AT command set result codes  
The following table shows the result codes.  
The result code summary  
Result Code  
OK  
Numeric  
Description  
0
1
2
3
Commandexecuted  
CONNECT  
RING  
Modem connected to line  
A ring signal has been detected  
NOCARRIER  
Modem lost carrier signal, or does  
not detect carrier signal, or does  
not detect answer tone  
ERROR  
4
Invalidcommand  
CONNECT1200EC*1  
NODIALTONE  
5
Connection at 1200 bps  
No dial tone detected  
Busy signal detected  
No quiet answer  
6
BUSY  
7
NOANSWER  
8
CONNECT2400EC*1  
CONNECT4800EC*1  
CONNECT9600EC*1  
CONNECT14400EC*1  
CONNECT19200EC*1  
CONNECT7200EC*1  
CONNECT12000EC*1  
CONNECT16800EC*1  
CONNECT300EC*1  
CONNECT21600EC*1  
CONNECT24000EC*1  
CONNECT26400EC*1  
CONNECT28800EC*1  
CONNECT31200EC*1  
CONNECT33600EC*1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
Connection at 2400 bps  
Connection at 4800 bps  
Connection at 9600 bps  
Connection at 14400 bps  
Connection at 19200 bps  
Connection at 7200 bps  
Connection at 12000 bps  
Connection at 16800 bps  
Connection at 300 bps  
Connection at 21600 bps  
Connection at 24000 bps  
Connection at 26400 bps  
Connection at 28800 bps  
Connection at 31200 bps  
Connection at 33600 bps  
D-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Result Code  
Numeric  
Description  
DELAYED*2  
88  
Delay is in effect for the dialed  
number  
BLACKLISTED*2  
89  
90  
Dialed number is blacklisted  
Blacklistisfull  
BLACKLISTFULL*2  
*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is  
enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending upon  
the error control method used:  
V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.  
V.42 - V.42 error control only.  
MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data compression.  
MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.  
NoEC - No error control protocol.  
*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.  
D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
D-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
V.90  
The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is capable of  
downstream speeds of 56Kbps (kilobits per second) when connected to an Internet  
service provider that supports V.90. As with any modem, the actual throughput  
(speed of data transfer) depends on analog telephone line conditions, which can  
vary considerably. Therefore, many users will experience throughput in the range of  
28-50Kbps under normal telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34  
rate.  
NOTE: V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host  
modem is connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select  
automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a  
combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90  
connection.  
V.90 mode  
Function  
Transmissionspeed  
DataV.90  
From 56K (maximum) to 28Kbps (minimum)  
Receptiononly  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connection  
No.  
Result code  
Description  
70  
CONNECT 32000 EC*  
CONNECT 36000 EC*  
CONNECT 40000 EC*  
CONNECT 44000 EC*  
CONNECT 48000 EC*  
CONNECT 52000 EC*  
Connection at 32000 bps  
72  
74  
76  
78  
80  
Connection at 36000 bps  
Connection at 40000 bps  
Connection at 44000 bps  
Connection at 48000 bps  
Connection at 52000 bps  
82  
CONNECT 56000 EC*  
CONNECT 28000 EC*  
CONNECT 29333 EC*  
CONNECT 30666 EC*  
CONNECT 33333 EC*  
CONNECT 34666 EC*  
CONNECT 37333 EC*  
CONNECT 38666 EC*  
CONNECT 41333 EC*  
CONNECT 42666 EC*  
CONNECT 45333 EC*  
CONNECT 46666 EC*  
CONNECT 49333 EC*  
CONNECT 50666 EC*  
CONNECT 53333 EC*  
CONNECT 54666 EC*  
Connection at 56000 bps  
Connection at 28000 bps  
Connection at 29333 bps  
Connection at 30666 bps  
Connection at 33333 bps  
Connection at 34666 bps  
Connection at 37333 bps  
Connection at 38666 bps  
Connection at 41333 bps  
Connection at 42666 bps  
Connection at 45333 bps  
Connection at 46666 bps  
Connection at 49333 bps  
Connection at 50666 bps  
Connection at 53333 bps  
Connection at 54666 bps  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
*EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when the extended  
result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the  
following symbols, depending on the error control method used.  
V42bis V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
V42 V.42errorcontrolonly  
NoEC No error control protocol  
AT Command  
-V90=* V.90DialLineRate  
-V90setsthemaximumV.90downstreamthatthemodemattemptsto  
connect.  
-V90=0 V.90disabled  
-V90=1 V.90enabled:automaticspeedselection-maximummodemspeed  
(default)  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Internal Modem Guide  
This appendix describes how to install and the remove the internal modem.  
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the computer beyond the steps described  
in this instruction or touch any components not specifically described.  
Installing the internal modem  
NOTE: The internal modem is preinstalled. The following is for informa-  
tion only.  
To install the internal modem follow the procedures below.  
Installing the modem board and jack  
To install the modem board and jack, follow the steps below.  
1. Save your data and turn off the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and other peripheral devices.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove one screw securing the cover.  
5. Slip your fingernail or a narrow object into a notch under the cover and lift off  
the cover.  
6. Remove two screws, which you use later to secure the modem board.  
7. Connect the modem board cable and seat the modem board.  
8. Secure the modem board with two screws removed in step 6.  
9. Secure the cover with one screw.  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Removing the internal modem  
To remove the internal modem, follow the steps below.  
1. Save your data and turn off the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and any other peripheral device.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove one screw securing the cover.  
5. Remove the modem cover.  
6. Remove two screws and remove the modem board.  
7. Disconnect the modem cable.  
8. Secure the modem cover with one screw.  
9. Install the battery pack.  
Refer to the installation procedures for details.  
F-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G  
Wireless LAN  
This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up and  
running,withaminimumofparameters.  
Card specifications  
FormFactor  
MiniPCITypeIII  
Capability  
IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS (DSSS)  
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wireless  
Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA)  
Network  
Operating  
System  
MicrosoftWindows®Networking  
Media Access  
Protocol  
CSMA/CA(CollisionAvoidance)with  
Acknowledgment(ACK)  
DataRate  
54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6Mb/s(RevisionA)  
11/5.5/2/1Mb/s(RevisionB)  
108/96/72/48/36/24/18/12Mb/s(TurboMode)  
Radio characteristics  
Radio characteristics of Wireless LAN cards may vary according to:  
Country/region where the product was purchased  
Type of product  
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations. Although  
Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in  
the license-free 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, local radio regulations may impose a  
number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment.  
NOTE: Refer to the sheet Information to the User for regulatory informa-  
tion that may apply in your country/region.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
R-FFrequency  
Band5GHz(5150-5850MHz)(RevisionA,  
TurboMode)  
Band2.4GHz(2400-2483.5MHz)(Revision  
B)  
ModulationTechnique  
DirectSequenceSpreadSpectrum  
CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK (Revision B)  
OFDM-BPSK,OFDM-QPSK,OFDM-  
16QAM,OFDM-64QAM(RevisionA,Turbo  
Mode)  
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the wireless  
communication. Communicationsatlowertransmitrangemaytravellargerdis-  
tances.  
The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are  
placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.  
Range is also affected by "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio signals  
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.  
Supported frequency sub-bands  
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in your country/region, your Wireless  
LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.  
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for information  
about the radio regulations that apply in your country/region.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B)  
FrequencyRangeChannelID  
2400-2472MHz  
2412  
1
2
2417  
3
2422  
4
2427  
5
2432  
6
2437  
7
2442  
8
2447  
9
2452  
10  
11  
2457*  
2462  
* Factory-set default channels  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G  
When installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as  
follows:  
For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the Wireless  
LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel identified by the  
Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between different access points  
the station can dynamically switch to another channel if required.  
For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients operating in a peer-to-peer  
mode, the card will use the default channel 10.  
In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the factory-  
set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN Administrator selected a  
different channel when configuring the Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A)  
FrequencyRangeChannelID  
5150-5850MHz  
5180  
Note  
36  
40  
5200  
44  
5220  
48  
5240  
52  
5260  
56  
5280  
60  
5300  
64  
5320  
149  
153  
157  
161  
5745  
US only *  
US only *  
US only *  
US only *  
5765  
5785  
5805  
* Available Area: US (USA, CANADA) only  
A peer-to-peer mode is available under the following condition:  
AWirelessLANcardreceivesaUScounty/regioncodebeaconofthestandardIEEE  
802.11 (Revision D) from a Wireless LAN Access Point.  
G-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Wireless Channels Sets (Turbo Mode)  
FrequencyRangeChannelID  
5150-5850MHz  
5210  
Note  
42  
50  
US only *  
US only *  
US only *  
US only *  
US only *  
5250  
58  
152  
160  
5290  
5760  
5800  
* Available Area: US (USA, CANADA) only  
A peer-to-peer mode is available under the following condition:  
AWirelessLANcardreceivesaUScounty/regioncodebeaconofthestandardIEEE  
802.11 (Revision D) from a Wireless LAN Access Point.  
G-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix H  
AC Power Cord and  
Connectors  
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various international  
AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for the country/region in  
which it is used. All cords must meet the following specifications:  
Length:  
Minimum2meters  
Minimum0.75mm2  
Minimum2.5amperes  
Wiresize:  
Currentrating:  
Voltagerating:  
125or250VAC  
(depending on country/region’s power standards)  
Certificationagencies  
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified  
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2 two conductor  
Europe:  
Austria:  
OVE  
Italy:  
IMQ  
Belgium:  
Denmark:  
Finland:  
France:  
CEBEC  
DEMKO  
SETI  
The Netherlands:  
Norway:  
KEMA  
NEMKO  
SEMKO  
SEV  
Sweden:  
UTE  
Switzerland:  
UnitedKingdom:  
Germany:  
VDE  
BSI  
Australia:  
Japan:  
AS  
DENANHO  
In Europe, power cords must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F and two conductor.  
For the United States and Canada, plug configuration must be a 2-15P (250 V) or 1-  
15P (125 V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical code handbook and the  
CanadianElectricalCodePartII.  
H-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada, the  
United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.  
USA and Canada  
United Kingdom  
UL approved  
BS approved  
CSA approved  
Australia  
Europe  
Approved by the  
AS approved  
appropriate agency  
H-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix I  
Parts Numbers  
The computer configuration and parts numbers, printed on a label on the bottom of  
the computer, indicate the CPU, LCD, memory, HDD, Slim Select Bay modules  
and communication devices.  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's Manual  
Configurations  
The following table shows the computer configuration indicated on a label. Shaded areas indicate abbreviations used on the  
label. The explanations are to the left of the shading. Abbreviations are not limited to those in this chart. They may change  
without notice.  
CPU  
LCD  
Memory  
HDD  
30GB  
Slim Select Bay  
Communication  
Pentium® M  
1.3G PM1.3  
14"TFT-XGA  
14"TFT-SXGA+  
14X  
14+  
128MB  
128MB  
256MB  
256MB  
384MB  
512MB  
512MB  
640MB  
768MB  
1024MB  
30 CD-ROM  
CD  
802.11b  
WLb  
1.4G PM1.4  
1.5G PM1.5  
1.6G PM1.6  
128+128MB  
256MB  
40GB  
50GB  
60GB  
40 DVD-ROM  
DVD  
802.11a/b combo  
802.11b/BT  
WLab  
50 CD-RW/DVD-ROM  
60 DVD-Multi  
RW/DV  
DRM  
WLb/BT  
WLab/BT  
256+128MB  
256+256MB  
512MB  
802.11a/b combo/BT  
Weight Saver  
512+128MB  
512+256MB  
512+512MB  
1024+1024MB 2048MB  
*Figures indicate the CPU operating speed in megahertz. For example, PM1.3 means Intel® Pentium® M processor 1.3  
GHz.  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate naming  
is included for reference.  
IDE: integrated drive electronics  
Abbreviations  
I/O: input/output  
AC: alternating current  
IrDA: Infrared Data Association  
AGP: accelerated graphics port  
IRQ: interrupt request  
ANSI: American National Standards  
Institute  
KB: kilobyte  
APM: advanced power manager  
LCD: liquid crystal display  
LED: lightemittingdiode  
LSI: large scale integration  
ASCII: AmericanStandardCodefor  
Information Interchange  
BIOS: basic input output system  
MS-DOS:MicrosoftDiskOperating  
CD-ROM: CompactDisc-ReadOnly  
System  
Memory  
OCR: optical character recognition  
CD-RW: CompactDisc-Read/Write  
(reader)  
CMOS: complementarymetal-oxide  
PCB: printed circuit board  
semiconductor  
PCI: peripheral component intercon-  
CPU: central processing unit  
CRT: cathode ray tube  
DC: direct current  
nect  
RAM: random access memory  
RGB: red, green, and blue  
ROM: read only memory  
RTC: real time clock  
DDC: display data channel  
DMA: directmemoryaccess  
DOS: disk operating system  
DVD:digitalversatiledisc  
ECP: extended capabilities port  
FDD: floppy disk drive  
FIR: fastinfrared  
SCSI: small computer system  
interface  
SIO: serial input/output  
SXGA+: super extended graphics  
array plus  
HDD: hard disk drive  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AccuPoint  
alternatingcurrent(AC): Electric  
current that reverses its direction of  
flow at regular intervals.  
(Abbreviationscontinued)  
TFT: thin-filmtransistor  
UART: universal asynchronous  
analog signal: A signal whose  
characteristics such as amplitude and  
frequency vary in proportion to (are an  
analog of) the value to be transmitted.  
Voice communications are analog  
signals.  
receiver/transmitter  
USB: UniversalSerialBus  
UXGA: ultra extended graphicsarray  
VESA: Video Electronic Standards  
Association  
ANSI: American National Standards  
Institute. An organization established  
to adopt and define standards for a  
variety of technical disciplines. For  
example, ANSI defined the ASCII  
standard and other information  
processing requirements.  
VGA: video graphics array  
VRT: voltage reduction technology  
XGA: extended graphics array  
A
AccuPoint: A pointing device  
integrated into the TOSHIBA  
computer keyboard.  
antistatic: A material used to prevent  
the buildup of static electricity.  
application: A group of programs  
that together are used for a specific  
task such as accounting, financial  
planning, spreadsheets, word process-  
ing and games.  
adaptor: A device that provides an  
interface between two dissimilar  
electronic devices. For example, the  
AC adaptor modifies the power from a  
wall outlet for use by the computer.  
This term also refers to the add-in  
circuit cards that control external  
devices, such as video monitors and  
magnetic tape devices.  
ASCII: American Standard Code for  
Information Interchange. ASCII code is  
a set of 256 binary codes that represent  
the most commonly used letters,  
numbers, and symbols.  
allocate: To assign a space or  
function for a specific task.  
async: Short for asynchronous.  
asynchronous: Lackingregulartime  
relationship. As applied to computer  
communications, asynchronous refers  
to the method of transmitting data that  
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters  
including letters, numbers and other  
symbols, such as punctuation marks or  
mathematical symbols.  
Glossary-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
cache memory  
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program  
that starts or restarts the computer.  
The program reads instructions from a  
storage device into the computer’s  
memory.  
does not require a steady stream of  
bits to be transmitted at regular time  
intervals.  
B
bps: Bits per second. Typically used  
to describe the data transmission  
speed of a modem.  
backup: A duplicate copy of files kept  
as a spare in case the original is  
destroyed.  
buffer: The portion of the computer’s  
memorywheredataistemporarily  
stored. Buffers often compensate for  
differences in the rate of flow from one  
device to another.  
batch file: A file that can be executed  
from the system prompt containing a  
sequence of operating system com-  
mands or executable files.  
binary: The base two number system  
composed of zeros and ones (off or  
on), used by most digital computers.  
The right-most digit of a binary number  
has a value of 1, the next a value of 2,  
then 4, 8, 16, and so on. For example,  
the binary number 101 has a value of 5.  
See also ASCII.  
bus: An interface for transmission of  
signals, data or electric power.  
byte: The representation of a single  
character. A sequence of eight bits  
treated as a single unit; also the  
smallest addressable unit within the  
system.  
BIOS: Basic Input Output System.  
The firmware that controls data flow  
within the computer. See also firmware.  
C
cachememory: Highspeedmemory  
which stores data that increases  
processor speed and data transfer rate.  
When the CPU reads data from main  
memory, it stores a copy of this data in  
cache memory. The next time the CPU  
needs that same data, it looks for it in  
the cache memory rather than the main  
memory, which saves time. The  
computer has two cache levels. Level  
one is incorporated into the processor  
and level two resides in external  
memory.  
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the  
basic unit of information used by the  
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight  
bits is one byte. See also byte.  
board: A circuit board. An internal  
card containing electronic components,  
called chips, which perform a specific  
function or increase the capabilities of  
the system.  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
capacity  
capacity: The amount of data that can  
CMOS: ComplementaryMetal-Oxide  
be stored on a magnetic storage  
Semiconductor. An electronic circuit  
device such as a diskette (floppy disk) fabricated on a silicon wafer that  
or hard disk. It is usually described in  
terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB  
= 1024 bytes and megabytes (MB),  
whereoneMB=1024KB.  
requires very little power. Integrated  
circuitsimplementedinCMOS  
technology can be tightly packaged  
and are highly reliable.  
card: Synonym for board. See board.  
cold start: Starting a computer that is  
currently off (turning on the power).  
CardBus: An industry standard bus  
for32-bitPCcards.  
COM1,COM2,COM3andCOM4:  
The names assigned to the serial and  
communication ports.  
CD-ROM: ACompactDisc-Read  
Only Memory is a high capacity disc  
that can be read from but not written  
to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,  
rather than magnetic heads, to read  
data from the disc.  
commands: Instructions you enter at  
the terminal keyboard that direct the  
actions of the computer or its periph-  
eral devices.  
CD-R: ACompactDisc-Recordable  
disc can be written once and read  
manytimes.SeealsoCD-ROM.  
communications: The means by  
which a computer transmits and  
receives data to and from another  
CD-RW: ACompactDisc-Read/Write computer or device. See parallel  
disc can be rewritten many times. See  
interface; serial interface.  
alsoCD-ROM.  
compatibility: 1) The ability of one  
computer to accept and process data in  
the same manner as another computer  
without modifying the data or the  
media upon which it is being trans-  
ferred. 2) the ability of one device to  
connect to or communicate with  
another system or component.  
character: Any letter, number,  
punctuation mark, or symbol used by  
the computer. Also synonymous with  
byte.  
chassis: The frame containing the  
computer.  
chip: A small semiconductor contain-  
ing computer logic and circuitry for  
processing, memory, input/output  
functions and controlling other chips.  
components: Elements or parts (of a  
system) which make up the whole  
(system).  
computer program: Asetofinstruc-  
tions written for a computer that  
enable it to achieve a desired result.  
Glossary-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
dialog box  
computer system: Acombinationof  
hardware,software,firmware,and  
peripheral components assembled to  
process data into useful information.  
D
data: Information that is factual,  
measurable or statistical that a  
computer can process, store, or  
retrieve.  
configuration: Thespecificcompo-  
nents in your system (such as the  
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and  
the settings that define how your  
system works. You use the HW Setup  
program to control your system  
configuration.  
data bits: A data communications  
parameter controlling the number of  
bits (binary digits) used to make up a  
byte. If data bits = 7 the computer  
can generate 128 unique characters.  
If data bits = 8 the computer can  
generate 256 unique characters.  
control keys: A key or sequence of  
keys you enter from the keyboard to  
initiate a particular function within a  
program.  
DC: Direct Current. Electric current  
that flows in one direction. This type  
of power is usually supplied by  
batteries.  
controller: Built-in hardware and  
software that controls the functions of  
a specific internal or peripheral device  
(e.g. keyboard controller).  
default: The parameter value  
automatically selected by the system  
when you or the program do not  
provide instructions. Also called a  
preset value.  
co-processor: A circuit built into the  
processor that is dedicated to intensive  
math calculations.  
delete: To remove data from a disk or  
other data storage device. Synony-  
mous with erase.  
CPS: Characters Per Second. Typi-  
cally used to indicate the transmission  
speed of a printer.  
devicedriver: Aprogramthat  
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The  
portion of the computer that interprets  
and executes instructions.  
controls communication between a  
specific peripheral device and the  
computer. TheCONFIG.SYSfile  
contains device drivers that MS-DOS  
loads when you turn the computer on.  
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum  
tube in which beams projected on a  
fluorescent screen-producing lumi-  
nous spots. An example is the  
television set.  
dialog box: A window that accepts  
user input to make system settings or  
record other information.  
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or  
line that indicates the current position  
on the display screen.  
Glossary-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
disk drive  
disk drive: The device that randomly  
accesses information on a disk and  
copies it to the computer’s memory. It  
also writes data from memory to the  
disk. To accomplish these tasks, the  
unit physically rotates the disk at high  
speed past a read-write head.  
DVD-RAM:ADigitalVersatileDisc  
Random Access Memory is a high-  
capacity, high performance disc that  
lets you store large volumes of data.  
The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to  
read data from the disc.  
DVD-ROM: ADigitalVersatileDisc  
Read Only Memory is a high capacity,  
high performance disc suitable for  
play back of video and other high-  
density files. The DVD-ROM drive  
uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
disk storage: Storing data on mag-  
netic disk. Data is arranged on  
concentric tracks much like a phono-  
graph record.  
diskette: A removable disk that stores  
magnetically encoded data. Also  
called a floppy disk.  
E
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image  
producing device used to view  
computer output.  
echo: To send back a reflection of the  
transmitted data to the sending  
device. You can display the informa-  
tion on the screen, or output it to the  
printer, or both. When a computer  
receives back data it transmitted to a  
CRT (or other peripheral device) and  
then retransmits the data to printer,  
the printer is said to echo the CRT.  
documentation: The set of manuals  
and/or other instructions written for the  
users of a computer system or applica-  
tion. Computer system documentation  
typically includes procedural and  
tutorial information as well as system  
functions.  
erase: See delete.  
DOS: Disk Operating System. See  
operating system.  
escape: 1) A code ( ASCII code 27),  
signaling the computer that what  
follows are commands; used with  
peripheral devices such as printers  
and modems. 2) A means of aborting  
the task currently in progress.  
driver: A software program, generally  
part of the operating system, that  
controls a specific piece of hardware  
(frequently a peripheral device such as  
a printer or mouse).  
escape guard time: A time before and  
after an escape code is sent to the  
modem which distinguishes between  
escapes that are part of the transmit-  
ted data, and escapes that are in-  
tended as a command to the modem.  
DualPointingDevice:Pointingdevice  
consisting of AccuPoint and Touch  
Pad. Both of these device can function  
together or separately. See AccuPoint  
and Touch Pad.  
Glossary-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
hexadecimal  
function keys: The keys labeled F1  
through F12 that tell the computer to  
perform certain functions.  
execute: To interpret and execute an  
instruction.  
ExtendedCapabilityPort:Anindustry  
standard that provides a data buffer,  
switchable forward and reverse data  
transmission, and run length encoding  
(RLE)support.  
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage  
equal to 1024 megabytes. See also  
megabyte.  
F
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other  
images, such as charts or graphs, to  
present information.  
fast infrared: An industry standard  
that enables cableless infrared serial  
data transfer at speeds of up to 4  
Mbps.  
H
file: A collection of related informa-  
tion; a file can contain data, programs,  
or both.  
hard disk: A non-removable disk  
usually referred to as drive C. The  
factory installs this disk and only a  
trained engineer can remove it for  
servicing. Also called fixed disk.  
firmware: A set of instructions built  
into the hardware which controls and  
directs a microprocessor’s activities.  
fixed disk: See hard disk.  
hard disk drive (HDD): An  
electromechanical device that reads  
and writes a hard disk. See also hard  
disk.  
floppy disk: See diskette.  
floppy disk drive (FDD): An electro-  
mechanical device that reads and  
writes to floppy disks. See also  
diskette.  
hardware: Thephysicalelectronic  
and mechanical components of a  
computer system: typically, the  
computer itself, external disk drives,  
etc. See also software and firmware.  
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets  
you assign functions to hot keys.  
folder: An icon in Windows used to  
store documents or other folders.  
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that  
equals one cycle per second.  
format: The process of readying a  
blank disk for its first use. Formatting  
establishes the structure of the disk  
that the operating system expects  
before it writes files or programs onto  
the disk.  
hexadecimal: Thebase16numbering  
system composed of the digits 0  
through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E,  
and F.  
Glossary-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
host computer  
host computer: The computer that  
controls, regulates, and transmits  
information to a device or another  
computer.  
interface: 1) Hardware and/or  
software components of a system  
used specifically to connect one  
system or device to another. 2) To  
physically connect one system or  
device to another to exchange  
information. 3) The point of contact  
between user, the computer, and the  
program, for example, the keyboard or  
a menu.  
hot key: The computer’s feature in  
which certain keys in combination with  
the extended function key, Fn, can be  
used to set system parameters, such  
as speaker volume.  
HWSetup:ATOSHIBAutilitythat  
lets you set the parameters for various  
hardware components.  
interrupt request: A signal that gives  
a component access to the processor.  
I/O: Input/output. Refers to accep-  
tance and transfer of data to and from  
a computer.  
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed  
on the screen or in the indicator panel.  
In Windows, an icon represents an  
object that the user can manipulate.  
I/O devices: Equipment used to  
communicate with the computer and  
transfer data to and from it.  
IrDA 1.1: An industry standard that  
enables cableless infrared serial data  
transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
i.LINK(IEEE1394):Thisportenables  
high-speed data transfer directly from  
external devices such as digital video  
cameras.  
J
infrared port: A cableless communi-  
cations port capable of using infrared  
signals to send serial data.  
jumper: Asmallcliporwirethat  
allows you to change the hardware  
characteristics by electrically connect-  
ing two points of a circuit.  
input: The data or instructions you  
provide to a computer, communication  
device or other peripheral device from  
the keyboard or external or internal  
storage devices. The data sent (or  
output) by the sending computer is  
input for the receiving computer.  
K
K: TakenfromtheGreekwordkilo,  
meaning 1000; often used as equiva-  
lent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th  
power. See also byte and kilobyte.  
instruction: Statements or commands  
that specify how to perform a particu-  
lar task.  
KB: See kilobyte.  
Glossary-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
monitor  
keyboard: An input device contain-  
ing switches that are activated by  
manually pressing marked keys. Each  
keystroke activates a switch that  
transmits a specific code to the  
computer. For each key, the transmit-  
ted code is, in turn, representative of  
the (ASCII) character marked on the  
key.  
M
mainboard: Seemotherboard.  
megabyte (MB): A unit of data  
storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See  
also kilobyte.  
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency  
that equals 1 million cycles per  
second. See also hertz.  
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage  
equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte  
and megabyte.  
menu: A software interface that  
displays a list of options on the screen.  
Also called a screen.  
L
microprocessor: A hardware compo-  
nent contained in a single integrated  
circuit that carries out instructions.  
Also called the central processing unit  
(CPU), one of the main parts of the  
computer.  
level 2 cache: See cache.  
LightEmittingDiode(LED): A  
semiconductor device that emits light  
when a current is applied.  
mode: A method of operation, for  
example, the boot mode, standby  
mode or the hibernation mode.  
LiquidCrystalDisplay(LCD): Liquid  
crystal sealed between two sheets of  
glass coated with transparent con-  
ducting material. The viewing-side  
coating is etched into character  
forming segments with leads that  
extend to the edge of the glass.  
Applying a voltage between the glass  
sheets alters the brightness of the  
liquidcrystal.  
modem: Derivedfrommodulator/  
demodulator, a device that converts  
(modulates) digital data for transmis-  
sion over telephone lines and then  
converts modulated data (demodu-  
lates) to digital format where received.  
monitor: A device that uses rows and  
columns of pixels to display alphanu-  
meric characters or graphic images.  
See also CRT.  
LSI: Large Scale Integration. 1) A  
technology that allows the inclusion  
of up to 100,000 simple logic gates on  
a single chip. 2) An integrated circuit  
that uses large scale integration.  
Glossary-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
motherboard  
characters and input them into a  
storage device.  
motherboard: Anamesometimes  
used to refer to the main printed circuit  
board in processing equipment. It  
usually contains integrated circuits  
that perform the processor’s basic  
functions and provides connectors for  
adding other boards that perform  
special functions. Sometimes called a  
mainboard.  
online state: A functional state of a  
peripheral device when it is ready to  
receive or transmit data.  
operating system: A group of  
programs that controls the basic  
operation of a computer. Operating  
system functions include interpreting  
programs, creating data files, and  
controlling the transmission and  
receipt (input/output) of data to and  
from memory and peripheral devices.  
MP3: An audio compression standard  
that enables high-quality transmission  
and real-time playback of sound files.  
N
output: The results of a computer  
operation. Output commonly indicates  
data 1) printed on paper, 2) displayed  
at a terminal, 3) sent through the serial  
port of internal modem, or 4) stored  
on some magnetic media.  
non-system disk: A formatted  
diskette (floppy disk) you can use to  
store programs and data but you  
cannot use to start the computer. See  
system disk.  
nonvolatilememory: Memory,usually  
read-only (ROM), that is capable of  
permanentlystoringinformation.  
Turning the computer’s power off  
does not alter data stored in nonvola-  
tilememory.  
P
parallel interface: Refers to a type of  
information exchange that transmits  
information one byte (8 bits) at a time.  
See also serial interface.  
numerickeypadoverlay:Afeature  
that allows you to use certain keys on  
the keyboard to perform numeric entry,  
or to control cursor and page move-  
ment.  
parity: 1)Thesymmetricalrelationship  
between two parameter values  
(integers) both of which are either on  
or off; odd or even; 0 or 1. 2) In serial  
communications, an error detection bit  
that is added to a group of data bits  
making the sum of the bits even or  
odd. Parity can be set to none, odd, or  
even.  
O
OCR: OpticalCharacterRecognition  
(reader). A technique or device that  
uses laser or visible light to identify  
Glossary-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
restart  
itself is typically flat and rectangular,  
and constructed of fiberglass, to form  
the attachment surface.  
password: A unique string of charac-  
ters used to identify a specific user.  
The computer provides various levels  
of password protection such as user,  
supervisor and eject.  
program: A set of instructions a  
computer can execute that enables it  
to achieve a desired result. See also  
application.  
pel: The smallest area of the display  
that can be addressed by software.  
Equal in size to a pixel or group of  
pixels. Seepixel.  
prompt: A message the computer  
provides indicating it is ready for or  
requires information or an action from  
you.  
peripheralcomponentinterconnect:  
An industry standard 32-bit bus.  
peripheral device: An I/O device that  
is external to the central processor  
and/or main memory such as a printer  
or a mouse.  
R
Radiofrequencyinterference(RFI)  
shield: A metal shield enclosing the  
printed circuit boards of the printer or  
computer to prevent radio and TV  
interference. All computer equipment  
generates radio frequency signals.  
The FCC regulates the amount of  
signals a computing device can allow  
past its shielding. A Class A device is  
sufficient for office use. Class B  
provides a more stringent classifica-  
tion for home equipment use.  
pixel: A picture element. The smallest  
dot that can be made on a display or  
printer. Also called a pel.  
plugandplay: Acapabilitywith  
Windows that enables the system to  
automatically recognize connections  
of external devices and make the  
necessary configurations in the  
computer.  
port: The electrical connection  
through which the computer sends  
and receives data to and from devices  
or other computers.  
TOSHIBA portable computers comply  
with Class B computing device  
regulations.  
PowerSaverUtility:ATOSHIBA  
utility that lets you set the parameters  
for various power-saving functions.  
RandomAccessMemory(RAM):  
High speed memory within the  
computer circuitry that can be read or  
written to.  
printedcircuitboard(PCB): A  
hardware component of a processor to  
which integrated circuits and other  
components are attached. The board  
restart: Resetting a computer without  
turning it off (also called “warm boot”  
or “soft reset”). See also boot.  
Glossary-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RGB  
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device  
that uses three input signals, each  
activating an electron gun for a  
primary additive color (red, green, and  
blue) or port for using such a device.  
See also CRT.  
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The  
electronic methodology used in serial  
data transmission.  
soft key: Key combinations that  
emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,  
change some configuration options,  
stop program execution, and access  
the numeric keypad overlay.  
RJ11: A modular telephone jack.  
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.  
software: The set of programs,  
procedures and related documentation  
associated with a computer system.  
Specifically refers to computer  
programs that direct and control the  
computer system’s activities. See  
also hardware.  
ROM: Read Only Memory: A  
nonvolatilememorychipmanufac-  
tured to contain information that  
controls the computer’s basic opera-  
tion. You cannot access or change  
information stored in ROM.  
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte  
that follow the transmitted character  
or group codes in asynchronous serial  
communications.  
S
SCSI:SmallComputerSystem  
Interface is an industry standard  
interface for connection of a variety of  
peripheral devices.  
subpixel: Three elements, one red,  
one green and blue (RGB), that make  
up a pixel on the color LCD. The  
computer sets subpixels indepen-  
dently, each may emit a different  
degree of brightness. See also pixel.  
SD cards: Secure Digital cards are  
flash memory widely used in a variety  
of digital devices such as digital  
cameras and Personal Digital Assis-  
tants.  
synchronous: Having a constant time  
interval between successive bits,  
characters or events.  
serialcommunications: Acommuni-  
cations technique that uses as few as  
two interconnecting wires to send bits  
one after another.  
system disk: A disk that has been  
formatted with an operating system.  
For MS-DOS the operating system is  
contained in two hidden files and the  
COMMAND.COMfile.Youcanboot  
a computer using a system disk. Also  
called an operating system disk.  
serial interface: Refers to a type of  
information exchange that transmits  
information sequentially, one bit at a  
time. Contrast:Parallelinterface.  
Glossary-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
write protection  
W
T
warm start: Restarting or resetting a  
computer without turning it off.  
terminal: Atypewriter-likekeyboard  
and CRT display screen connected to  
the computer for data input/output.  
window: A portion of the screen that  
can display its own application,  
document or dialog box. Often used to  
mean a Microsoft Windows window.  
TFT display: A liquid crystal display  
(LCD)madefromanarrayofliquid  
crystalcellsusingactive-matrix  
technology with thin film transistor  
(TFT) to drive each cell.  
writeprotection: Amethodfor  
protecting a diskette (floppy disk) from  
accidental erasure.  
Touch Pad: A pointing device  
integrated into the TOSHIBA com-  
puter palm rest.  
TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A  
logic circuit design that uses switch-  
ing transistors for gates and storage.  
U
Universal Serial Bus: This serial  
interface lets you communicate with  
several devices connected in a chain  
to a single port on the computer.  
V
VGA:VideoGraphicsArrayisan  
industry standard video adaptor that  
lets you run any popular software.  
volatilememory: Randomaccess  
memory (RAM) that stores information  
as long as power is supplied to the  
computer.  
Glossary-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Glossary-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
C
AC adaptor 1-4  
Cachememory 1-3  
additional 1-13,8-18  
connecting 3-5  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive 1-5,1-14  
location 2-4  
DCIN15Vport 2-5  
view 2-22  
problems 9-11  
using 4-7  
AccuPoint, See Dual Pointing Device  
ASCII characters 5-9  
view 2-17  
writingCDs 4-11  
Cleaning the computer 4-28  
Cooling (heat dispersal) 1-11  
location of vents 2-4  
settings 4-29  
B
Battery  
automatic hibernation 1-10  
save mode 6-11  
extendinglife 6-13  
indicator 2-11,6-4  
location 2-6  
CPU, See Processor  
D
Diskette drive 1-4  
using 4-3  
main6-5  
monitoringcapacity 6-11  
realtimeclock 1-3,6-6  
safety precautions 6-7  
save mode 1-10  
Secondary6-6  
view 2-13  
Display 1-5,2-8  
automatic power off 1-9  
brightness decrease 5-5  
brightness increase 5-6  
opening 3-6  
types 6-5  
Batterycharger 1-13,8-18  
Batterypack 1-3, 2-7  
additional 1-13,8-16  
replacing 6-14  
Bluetooth 1-8  
problems 9-24  
problems 9-8  
selection 5-5  
Documentation list 1-2  
DualPointingDevice 1-6,1-12  
AccuPoint 1-6, 2-9  
Touch Pad 1-6  
TOSHIBAStack,utility 1-12  
using 4-25  
Boot mode 3-7  
Touch Pad control buttons 2-10  
Touch Pad location 2-8  
problems 9-17  
Boot priority 7-2  
using 4-1  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's manual  
DVDVideoPlayer 1-12  
DVD-ROMdrive 1-4,1-14  
location 2-4  
G
Graphicscontroller 1-6  
problems 9-10  
using 4-7  
H
Harddiskdrive 1-4,1-14  
automatic power off 1-10  
problems 9-8  
view 2-15  
E
Headphone jack, See Sound system  
Heat dispersal, See Cooling  
Hibernation 1-11  
automatic 1-10  
setting 3-8  
Hot keys 1-9  
display brightness decrease 5-5  
display brightness increase 5-6  
display selection 5-5  
hibernation 5-5  
instant security 5-4  
power save mode 5-4  
standby 5-5  
wireless setting 5-6  
sound mute 5-4  
HW Setup 1-11  
Environment 3-1  
Equipmentchecklist 1-1  
Equipment setup  
general conditions 3-2  
placement 3-2  
Ergonomics  
lighting 3-4  
seating and posture 3-3  
work habits 3-4  
Expansionmemory,SeeMemory  
F
Fn + Ctrl (enhanced keyboard simula-  
tion) 5-3  
Fn + Enter 5-3  
Fn + Esc (sound mute) 5-4  
Fn + F1 (instant security) 5-4  
Fn + F2 (power save mode) 5-4  
Fn + F3 (standby) 5-5  
accessing 7-1  
boot priority 7-2  
CPU 7-2  
general 7-2  
Fn + F4 (hibernation) 5-5  
Fn + F5 (display selection) 5-5  
Fn + F6 (display brightness) 5-5  
Fn + F7 (display brightness) 5-6  
Fn + F8 (wireless setting) 5-6  
Fn + F9 (Dual Pointing Device) 5-6  
Fn+F10(arrowmode) 5-3  
Fn+F11(numericmode) 5-3  
Fn+F12(ScrLock) 5-3  
keyboard 7-5  
LAN 7-5  
window 7-1  
I
i.LINK 1-6,2-4,8-22  
connecting 8-22  
disconnecting 8-23  
precautions 8-22  
problems 9-21  
Fn + Space (display resolution selec-  
tion) 5-7  
Fn-esse 1-12  
Function keys 5-2  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Indicators  
keyboard 2-12  
system 2-2,2-11  
Infrared port 1-6  
location 2-1  
problems 9-16  
Instant security, See Hot keys  
Interfaces, See Ports  
M
Media care  
CD/DVDs 4-20  
diskettes 4-20  
SD card 8-7  
Memory 1-3  
expansion 1-13  
installing 8-8  
problems 9-19  
removing 8-13  
K
Keyboard 1-6,5-1  
Microphone jack, See Sound system  
Modem 1-7,4-21  
emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2  
F1 … F12 function keys 5-2  
Fn Sticky key 5-7  
hot keys 5-4  
problems 9-7  
connecting 4-23  
disconnecting 4-24  
jack 2-5  
problems 9-21  
typewriter keys 5-1  
properties menu 4-22  
region selection 4-21  
Monitor,external 1-6,2-5,8-20  
problems 9-20  
Windows special keys 5-7  
Keypadoverlay 1-10, 5-7  
arrowmode 5-8  
numericmode 5-8  
temporarily using normal keyboard  
(overlay on) 5-9  
Moving the computer 4-28  
N
temporarily using overlay (overlay  
off) 5-9  
Numeric keypad, See Keypad overlay  
turning on the overlays 5-8  
O
L
Overlay, See Keypad overlay  
LAN 1-7  
connecting 4-27  
P
Panel power off, See Power  
Password  
disconnecting 4-28  
jack 2-5  
LAN active indicator 2-5  
linkindicator 2-5  
power on 1-10  
problems 9-7  
starting the computer by 6-18  
PCcard 1-7  
problems 9-23  
LCD, See Display, Video modes and  
Monitorexternal  
Level 2 cache, See Cache memory  
Line-in jack, See Sound system  
Line-out jack, See Sound system  
Lock security, See Security lock  
inserting 8-2  
removing 8-3  
location of slot 2-2  
problems 9-16  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's manual  
Ports  
power 9-4  
externalmonitor 1-6  
i.LINK 1-6  
SDcard 9-15  
self test 9-4  
infrared 1-6  
USB 1-6  
Power  
button location 2-8  
conditions 6-1  
sound system 9-20  
supportfromTOSHIBA 9-25  
system start-up 9-3  
USB 9-19  
WirelessLAN 9-23  
Processor 1-3, 7-2  
indicators 6-4  
paneloff 1-10,6-19  
problems 9-4  
R
system auto off 6-19  
turning off 3-7  
Real time clock battery, See battery  
RecoveryCD-ROM 3-13  
hibernation mode 3-8  
shut down mode (boot mode) 3-7  
standby mode 3-10  
turning on 3-7  
Power supply 1-10  
Power-upmodes 6-18  
Problems  
ACpower9-5  
analyzing symptoms 9-2  
Battery9-6  
Restarting the computer 3-12  
S
SD card 1-7  
indicator 2-3  
inserting/removing 8-6  
location of slot 2-2  
problems 9-15  
care 8-7  
Securitylock 1-9,1-13,2-3,8-25  
Self test, See Problems  
SlimSelectBaymodules1-8  
HDDadaptor2-20,8-18  
location of slot 2-4  
2ndbatterypack2-20, 8-16  
using 4-5  
weight saver 2-21  
Soft keys  
emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2  
Enter 5-3  
rightCtrlkey 5-3  
ScrLock 5-3  
Sound system 1-7  
headphone jack 1-7, 2-2  
microphone2-10  
microphonejack 1-7,2-1  
mute hot keys 5-4  
problems 9-20  
Bluetooth 9-24  
CD-RW/DVD-ROMdrive 9-11  
Diskettedrive9-15  
DVD-ROMdrive 9-10  
hard disk drive 9-8  
hardware and system checklist 9-3  
i.LINK 9-21  
infraredport 9-16  
keyboard 9-7  
LAN 9-23  
LCDpanel 9-8  
memoryexpansion 9-19  
modem 9-21  
monitorexternal 9-20  
mouse,USB 9-18  
overheating power down 9-5  
password 9-7  
PCcard 9-16  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
speakers 2-9  
volume control 2-2  
Standby 1-11  
automatic 1-10  
setting 3-10  
System indicators, See indicators  
T
TOSHIBAConsole 1-9  
TOSHIBA Console button 1-9, 2-9  
TOSHIBAControls 1-11  
TOSHIBAPowerSaver 1-11  
Touch Pad, See Dual Pointing Device  
Troubleshooting, See Problems  
TV 8-21  
U
USB 1-6  
port location 2-2, 2-4  
problems 9-19  
V
Video modes Appendix B  
VideoRAM 1-3  
Video-out jack, See Sound system  
Volume control, See Sound system  
W
Wirelesscommunication 4-24  
indicators2-11,4-26  
setting by hot keys 5-6  
switch 2-2,4-26  
Wireless LAN 1-8  
problems 9-23  
using 4-24  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User's manual  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam CD Player CD DJ1 User Manual
Tecumseh Automobile Parts TH098SA User Manual
Texas Instruments Music Mixer TPA0202 User Manual
Toastmaster Convection Oven RA 5T User Manual
Toshiba Network Card MK1504GAL User Manual
Toshiba TV DVD Combo 19LV61K User Manual
Toshiba VCR W 708 User Manual
ViewSonic Projector J7606 User Manual
VocoPro Music Mixer DA 8900 User Manual
Wayne Dalton Door 200 20 User Manual